MULTIFUNCTION GENERATORWF1947/WF1948
Instruction Manual(External Control)

NF Corporation

DA00037649-003

MULTIFUNCTION GENERATORWF1947/WF1948
Instruction Manual(External Control)

PrefaceThis instruction manual describes the GPIB and USB interfaces of WF1947/WF1948. For operations
from the panel, see the separate manual "WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (Operations)."
The GPIB and USB interfaces of WF1947/WF1948 features abundant functions and can control
almost all operations on the front panel. In addition, they can read the setting values from external
equipment such as PC.
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control) consists of the following chapters.
1. Preparations before UseThis chapter describes the interface settings and the GPIB address settings.
2. Command Descriptions
This chapter describes the overview of the commands and setting examples.
3. Status System
This chapter describes the status reporting, including status byte, and standard event status
register.
4. Error Message
This chapter describes the error numbers and their meaning.
5. Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications of the external control interfaces.
6. Compatibility of External Control
This chapter describes the differences of control methods and the commands to which youneed to pay attention when migrating from our other WAVE FACTORY series products to
WF1947/WF1948.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)iTable of Contents

Page
1.

2.

Preparations before Use.................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1

Overview of WF1947/WF1948 GPIB/USB Interface ...................................................................................... 2

1.2

USB Preparations ................................................................................................................................................. 2

1.3

GPIB Preparations ................................................................................................................................................ 2

1.4

Selecting Interface ................................................................................................................................................ 3

1.5

GPIB Address Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 5

1.6

GPIB EOI Setting ................................................................................................................................................. 6

1.7

USB ID .................................................................................................................................................................. 7

1.8

Releasing Remote State ....................................................................................................................................... 7

1.9

Considerations ...................................................................................................................................................... 7

Command Descriptions .................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1

Overview of Commands .................................................................................................................................... 10

2.1.1

Conventions ................................................................................................................................................ 10

2.1.2

Commands .................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1.2.1 Common commands ......................................................................................................................... 10
2.1.2.2 Subsystem commands....................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.2.3 Subsystem command tree ................................................................................................................. 11
2.1.2.4 Subsystem command syntax ............................................................................................................ 14
2.1.2.5 Program message syntax .................................................................................................................. 19
2.1.2.6 Response message syntax ................................................................................................................. 20

2.2

Command List .................................................................................................................................................... 23

2.2.1

List Classification ....................................................................................................................................... 23

2.2.2

Notations in Lists ........................................................................................................................................ 23

2.2.3

Oscillation Mode Selection Command List .......................................................................................... 24

2.2.4

Output Waveform Selection Command List......................................................................................... 25

2.2.5

Individual Output Waveform Setting Command List .......................................................................... 26

2.2.6

Output Signal Setting Command List .................................................................................................... 27

2.2.7

Signal Output Operation Command List ............................................................................................... 28

2.2.8

Trigger Operation Command List .......................................................................................................... 28

2.2.9

Modulated Oscillation Mode Command List ....................................................................................... 29

2.2.10Sweep Oscillation Mode Command List .............................................................................................. 32

2.2.11Burst Oscillation Mode Command List................................................................................................. 35

2.2.12

Memory Operation Command List........................................................................................................ 36

2.2.13

Status System Command List................................................................................................................. 37

2.2.14Channel Operation 2-channel Equipment (WF1948) Command List ............................................. 39

2.2.15

Other Operations Command List ........................................................................................................... 40

2.3

Descriptions of Individual Commands ............................................................................................................. 41

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)ii2.3.1

Oscillation Mode Selection Command Details........................................................................................ 41
2.3.1.1 Continuous oscillation mode selection [:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous[:IMMediate] ................. 41
2.3.1.2 Continuous oscillation mode query [:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous:STATe? ............................. 41
2.3.1.3 Modulated oscillation mode FSK selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:STATe................... 42
2.3.1.4 Modulated oscillation mode PSK selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:STATe................... 42
2.3.1.5 Modulated oscillation mode FM selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:STATe .......................... 43
2.3.1.6 Modulated oscillation mode PM selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:STATe .......................... 43
2.3.1.7 Modulated oscillation mode AM selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:STATe ........................ 44
2.3.1.8 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:STATe 44
2.3.1.9 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:STATe..................................................................................................... 45
2.3.1.10 Modulated oscillation mode PWM selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:STATe .................. 45
2.3.1.11 Sweep oscillation mode sweep selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:MODE...................... 46
2.3.1.12 Sweep oscillation mode frequency sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:MODE ........................................................................................... 46
2.3.1.13 Sweep oscillation mode phase sweep selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:MODE ........... 47
2.3.1.14 Sweep oscillation mode amplitude sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:MODE ................................ 47
2.3.1.15 Sweep oscillation mode DC offset sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MODE .......................................... 48
2.3.1.16 Sweep oscillation mode duty sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:MODE .................................................................................... 49
2.3.1.17 Burst oscillation mode selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:STATe .................................... 49

2.3.2

Output Waveform Selection Command Details ................................................................................... 50
2.3.2.1 Waveform selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]................................................ 50
2.3.2.2 Arbitrary waveform selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:USER .................................... 50
2.3.2.3 Waveform polarity selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:POLarity ........................................................ 51
2.3.2.4 pAmplitude range selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SCALe............................................................. 52

2.3.3

Individual Output Waveform Setting Command Details........................................................................ 53
2.3.3.1 Square/pulse wave shared duty unit selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT. 53
2.3.3.2 Square/pulse wave shared duty user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:USER ..................................................................................... 53
2.3.3.3 Square wave duty value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle ............... 54
2.3.3.4 Square wave extension on/off selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend .. 55
2.3.3.5 Pulse wave duty value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle ...................................... 55
2.3.3.6 Pulse wave pulse width setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:WIDTh ...................................... 56
2.3.3.7 Pulse wave rising time setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing] ........... 57
2.3.3.8 Pulse wave falling time setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling............. 57
2.3.3.9 Pulse wave period setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod............................................... 58
2.3.3.10 Pulse wave period unit selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT ........................ 59
2.3.3.11 Pulse wave period user-defined unit setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:USER..... 59
2.3.3.12 Ramp wave symmetry setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry .............. 60

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)iii

2.3.4

Output Signal Setting Command Details .............................................................................................. 61
2.3.4.1 Frequency setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed].......................................... 61
2.3.4.2 Frequency unit selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:UNIT........................................... 61
2.3.4.3 Frequency user-defined unit setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:USER ....................... 62
2.3.4.4 Amplitude setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] ...... 63
2.3.4.5 Amplitude unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:UNIT................................... 63
2.3.4.6 Amplitude user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:USER .................................. 64
2.3.4.7 DC offset setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet.................. 65
2.3.4.8 DC offset unit setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT65
2.3.4.9 DC offset user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:USER ............................................ 66
2.3.4.10 Phase setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe[:ADJust] ................................................................. 67
2.3.4.11 Phase unit selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:UNIT ........................................................... 67
2.3.4.12 Phase user-defined unit setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:USER ........................................ 68
2.3.4.13 Output voltage range high level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH .......................................................... 69
2.3.4.14 Output voltage range high level unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT ............................................... 69
2.3.4.15 Output voltage range low level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW ........................................................... 70
2.3.4.16 Output voltage range low level unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT ................................................ 70

2.3.5

Signal Output Operation Command Details ............................................................................................ 71
2.3.5.1 Output on/off setting/query :OUTPut[1|2][:STATe] ..................................................................... 71
2.3.5.2 Output-on at power-on setting/query :OUTPut[1|2]:PON ............................................................ 71
2.3.5.3 Auto-range operation (output range) selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO ................................................................................ 72
2.3.5.4 Phase synchronization setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:INITiate................................................. 72
2.3.5.5 External addition input setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:COMBine:FEED .................................... 72
2.3.5.6 Load impedance setting/query :OUTPut[1|2]:LOAD .................................................................... 73

2.3.6

Trigger Operation Command Details ....................................................................................................... 73
2.3.6.1 Trigger operation Manual trigger (TRIG key operation) *TRG ................................................... 73
2.3.6.2 Trigger operation sweep mode trigger source
selection/query :TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SOURce ........................................................................ 74
2.3.6.3 Trigger operation sweep mode internal trigger cycle
setting/query :TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:TIMer ................................................................................ 74
2.3.6.4 Trigger operation sweep mode external trigger signal polarity
selection/query :TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SLOPe ........................................................................... 75
2.3.6.5 Trigger operation burst mode trigger source selection/query :TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SOURce 75
2.3.6.6 Trigger operation burst mode internal trigger cycle

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)ivsetting/query :TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:TIMer ................................................................................. 76
2.3.6.7 Trigger operation burst mode external trigger signal polarity
selection/query :TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SLOPe ............................................................................ 76
2.3.6.8 Trigger operation execution control setting :TRIGger[1|2]:SELected:EXECute........................ 77
2.3.7

Modulated Oscillation Mode Command Details ..................................................................................... 77
2.3.7.1 Modulated oscillation mode AM modulation degree setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM[:DEPTh] ...................................................................................................... 77
2.3.7.2 Modulated oscillation mode AM modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:SOURce....................................................................................................... 78
2.3.7.3 Modulated oscillation mode AM modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency ................................................................................ 78
2.3.7.4 Modulated oscillation mode AM modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] .................................................................. 79
2.3.7.5 Modulated oscillation mode AM arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform
selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER ............................................ 79
2.3.7.6 Modulated oscillation mode AM synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AM:TYPE ....................................................................... 80
2.3.7.7 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) modulation degree setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC[:DEPTh] ................................................................................................. 80
2.3.7.8 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:SOURce ................................................................................................. 81
2.3.7.9 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FREQuency ........................................................................... 81
2.3.7.10 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] ............................................................. 82
2.3.7.11 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform
selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER ....................................... 82
2.3.7.12 Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC) synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE .................................................................. 83
2.3.7.13 Modulated oscillation mode FM peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM[:DEViation] ................................................................................................. 83
2.3.7.14 Modulated oscillation mode FM modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:SOURce ....................................................................................................... 84
2.3.7.15 Modulated oscillation mode FM modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency ................................................................................. 84
2.3.7.16 Modulated oscillation mode FM modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] ................................................................... 85
2.3.7.17 Modulated oscillation mode FM arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER ........................................................................ 85
2.3.7.18 Modulated oscillation mode FM synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FM:TYPE ........................................................................ 86
2.3.7.19 Modulated oscillation mode FSK hop frequency setting/query

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)v

[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey[:FREQuency] ......................................................................................... 86
2.3.7.20 Modulated oscillation mode FSK modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:SOURce .................................................................................................. 87
2.3.7.21 Modulated oscillation mode FSK modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:INTernal:FREQuency ........................................................................... 87
2.3.7.22 Modulated oscillation mode FSK synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FSKey:TYPE .................................................................. 88
2.3.7.23 Modulated oscillation mode PM peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM[:DEViation] ................................................................................................. 88
2.3.7.24 Modulated oscillation mode PM modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:SOURce ....................................................................................................... 89
2.3.7.25 Modulated oscillation mode PM modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency ................................................................................. 89
2.3.7.26 Modulated oscillation mode PM modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] ................................................................... 90
2.3.7.27 Modulated oscillation mode PM arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER ........................................................................ 90
2.3.7.28 Modulated oscillation mode PM synchronization output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PM:TYPE ........................................................................ 91
2.3.7.29 Modulated oscillation mode PSK deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey[:DEViation] ............................................................................................ 91
2.3.7.30 Modulated oscillation mode PSK modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:SOURce .................................................................................................. 92
2.3.7.31 Modulated oscillation mode PSK modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:INTernal:FREQuency ........................................................................... 92
2.3.7.32 Modulated oscillation mode PSK synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PSKey:TYPE .................................................................. 93
2.3.7.33 Modulated oscillation mode PWM peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle ............................................................................. 93
2.3.7.34 Modulated oscillation mode PWM modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:SOURce ................................................................................................... 94
2.3.7.35 Modulated oscillation mode PWM modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency ............................................................................. 94
2.3.7.36 Modulated oscillation mode PWM modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] ............................................................... 95
2.3.7.37 Modulated oscillation mode PWM arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform
selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER ......................................... 95
2.3.7.38 Modulated oscillation mode PWM synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PWM:TYPE .................................................................... 96
2.3.7.39 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM[:DEViation] ............................................................................................ 96
2.3.7.40 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation modulation source selection/query

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)vi[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:SOURce .................................................................................................. 97
2.3.7.41 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FREQuency ........................................................................... 97
2.3.7.42 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] .............................................................. 98
2.3.7.43 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation arbitrary waveform of modulation
waveform selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER ..................... 98
2.3.7.44 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:OFSM:TYPE................................................................... 99
2.3.8

Sweep Oscillation Mode Command Details .......................................................................................... 100
2.3.8.1 Basic sweep setting sweep slope selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SPACing ............. 100
2.3.8.2 Basic sweep setting sweep direction selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion ........................................................................... 100
2.3.8.3 Basic sweep setting sweep time setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:TIME ........................ 101
2.3.8.4 Basic sweep setting stop level setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel ........................ 101
2.3.8.5 Basic sweep setting stop level selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe ...... 102
2.3.8.6 Basic sweep setting oscillation stop unit setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:OSTop ........ 102
2.3.8.7 Frequency sweep starting value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STARt............... 103
2.3.8.8 Frequency sweep stop value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STOP ...................... 103
2.3.8.9 Frequency sweep center value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:CENTer............... 104
2.3.8.10 Frequency sweep span value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SPAN..................... 105
2.3.8.11 Frequency sweep marker value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:FREQuency ........... 105
2.3.8.12 Frequency sweep start/stop value swapping setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SWAP ..... 106
2.3.8.13 Frequency sweep start/stop value output setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STATe .......... 106
2.3.8.14 Phase sweep starting value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STARt ............................... 107
2.3.8.15 Phase sweep stop value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STOP ...................................... 107
2.3.8.16 Phase sweep center value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:CENTer ............................... 108
2.3.8.17 Phase sweep span value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SPAN ..................................... 108
2.3.8.18 Phase sweep marker value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PHASe ........................... 109
2.3.8.19 Phase sweep start/stop value swapping setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SWAP ...................... 109
2.3.8.20 Phase sweep start/stop value output setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STATe........................... 110
2.3.8.21 Amplitude sweep starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STARt ............................... 110
2.3.8.22 Amplitude sweep stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STOP ................................ 111
2.3.8.23 Amplitude sweep center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:CENTer ............................ 111
2.3.8.24 Amplitude sweep span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SPAN ................................ 112
2.3.8.25 Amplitude sweep marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]........................... 113
2.3.8.26 Amplitude sweep start/stop value swapping setting

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)vii

[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SWAP ............................... 113
2.3.8.27 Amplitude sweep start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STATe .............................. 114
2.3.8.28 DC offset sweep starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt......................................... 114
2.3.8.29 DC offset sweep stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP .......................................... 115
2.3.8.30 DC offset sweep center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer ...................................... 115
2.3.8.31 DC offset sweep span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN .......................................... 116
2.3.8.32 DC offset sweep marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet..................................... 117
2.3.8.33 DC offset sweep start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SWAP ......................................... 117
2.3.8.34 DC offset sweep start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STATe ........................................ 118
2.3.8.35 Duty sweep starting value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt................. 118
2.3.8.36 Duty sweep stop value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP ........................ 119
2.3.8.37 Duty sweep center value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer................. 120
2.3.8.38 Duty sweep span value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN....................... 121
2.3.8.39 Duty sweep marker value setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PULSe:DCYCle ............. 122
2.3.8.40 Duty sweep start/stop value swapping setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SWAP ....... 122
2.3.8.41 Duty sweep start/stop value output setting [:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe ............ 123
2.3.9

Burst Oscillation Mode Command Details ............................................................................................ 124
2.3.9.1 Burst oscillation burst mode selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:MODE ......................... 124
2.3.9.2 Burst oscillation stop level setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel .............................. 124
2.3.9.3 Burst oscillation stop level selection/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel:STATe............. 125
2.3.9.4 Burst oscillation synchronization signal output
selection/query :OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:BURSt:TYPE ................................................................ 125
2.3.9.5 Burst oscillation auto burst mode: mark wave number setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:NCYCles ................................................................................. 126
2.3.9.6 Burst oscillation auto burst mode: space wave number setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:SPACe ..................................................................................... 126
2.3.9.7 Burst oscillation trigger burst mode: mark wave number setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:NCYCles........................................................................... 127
2.3.9.8 Burst oscillation trigger burst mode: trigger delay time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:TDELay ............................................................................ 128
2.3.9.9 Burst oscillation gate mode: oscillation stop unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:GATE:OSTop...................................................................................... 128
2.3.9.10 Burst oscillation triggered gate mode: oscillation stop unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:TGATe:OSTop .................................................................................... 129

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)viii

2.3.10

Memory Operation Command Details ................................................................................................... 130
2.3.10.1 Basic setting memory clear :MEMory:STATe:DELete .............................................................. 130
2.3.10.2 Basic setting memory store *SAV................................................................................................. 130
2.3.10.3 Basic setting memory recall *RCL ................................................................................................ 130
2.3.10.4 Arbitrary waveform memory arbitrary waveform data transfer/read-out {:TRACe|DATA}[:DATA] ........................................................................................................................................ 131
2.3.10.5 Arbitrary waveform memory store {:TRACe|DATA}:STORe .................................................. 133
2.3.10.6 Arbitrary waveform memory recall {:TRACe|DATA}:RECall ................................................. 133
2.3.10.7 Arbitrary waveform memory copy {:TRACe|DATA}:COPY ................................................... 134
2.3.10.8 Arbitrary waveform memory delete {:TRACe|DATA}:DELete ............................................... 135
2.3.10.9 Arbitrary waveform memory information acquisition {:TRACe|DATA}:INFormation? ....... 135

2.3.11

Status System Command Details ............................................................................................................ 136
2.3.11.1 Status register and related queue clear *CLS................................................................................ 136
2.3.11.2 Status reporting related preset setting :STATus:PRESet ............................................................. 136
2.3.11.3 Status register at power-on clear flag setting/query *PSC........................................................... 137
2.3.11.4 Status byte register query *STB? ................................................................................................... 137
2.3.11.5 Service request enable register setting/query *SRE ..................................................................... 137
2.3.11.6 Standard event status register query *ESR? ................................................................................. 138
2.3.11.7 Standard event enable register setting/query *ESE ...................................................................... 138
2.3.11.8 Condition register query :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? ..................................................... 138
2.3.11.9 Transition filter register (negative) setting/query :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition ............. 139
2.3.11.10 Transition filter register (positive) setting/query :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition ............ 139
2.3.11.11 Event register query :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? .............................................................. 140
2.3.11.12 Event enable register setting/query :STATus:OPERation:ENABle ........................................ 140
2.3.11.13 Operation status register group (CH1) Condition register
query :STATus:OPERation:CH1:CONDition? ......................................................................... 140
2.3.11.14 Operation status register group (CH1) Transition filter register (negative)
setting/query :STATus:OPERation:CH1:NTRansition............................................................. 141
2.3.11.15 Operation status register group (CH1) Transition filter register (positive)
setting/query :STATus:OPERation:CH1:PTRansition ............................................................. 141
2.3.11.16 Operation status register group (CH1) Event register
query :STATus:OPERation:CH1[:EVENt]?.............................................................................. 142
2.3.11.17 Operation status register group (CH1) Event enable registersetting/query :STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle .................................................................... 142
2.3.11.18 Operation status register group (CH2) condition register
query :STATus:OPERation:CH2:CONDition? ......................................................................... 142
2.3.11.19 Operation status register group (CH2) transition filter register (negative)
setting/query :STATus:OPERation:CH2:NTRansition............................................................. 143
2.3.11.20 Operation status register group (CH2) transition filter register (positive)
setting/query :STATus:OPERation:CH2:PTRansition ............................................................. 143
2.3.11.21 Operation status register group (CH2) event Registersetting :STATus:OPERation:CH2[:EVENt]? ............................................................................ 144

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)ix

2.3.11.22 Operation status register group (CH2) event enable registersetting/query :STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle .................................................................... 144
2.3.11.23 Questionable Data Status Register Group condition register
query :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? ............................................................................. 144
2.3.11.24 Questionable Data Status Register Group transition filter register (negative)
setting/query :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition ................................................................ 145
2.3.11.25 Questionable Data Status Register Group transition filter register (positive)
setting/query :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition ................................................................. 145
2.3.11.26 Questionable Data Status Register Group event register
query :STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? ................................................................................. 146
2.3.11.27 Questionable Data Status Register Group event enable registersetting/query :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle........................................................................ 146
2.3.11.28 Warning Event Register Group event register query :STATus:WARNing[:EVENt]? .......... 146
2.3.11.29 Warning Event Register Group event enable registersetting/query :STATus:WARNing:ENABle .............................................................................. 147
2.3.11.30 Warning Event Register Group (CH1) event register
query :STATus:WARNing:CH1[:EVENt]? .............................................................................. 147
2.3.11.31 Warning Event Register Group (CH1) event enable registersetting/query :STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle..................................................................... 147
2.3.11.32 Warning Event Register Group (CH2) event register
query :STATus:WARNing:CH2[:EVENt]? .............................................................................. 148
2.3.11.33 Warning Event Register Group (CH2) event enable registersetting/query :STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle..................................................................... 148
2.3.12Channel Operation 2-channel Equipment (WF1948) Command Details............................................ 149
2.3.12.1 2-channel equipment (WF1948) channel mode setting/query :CHANnel:MODE ................... 149
2.3.12.2 2-channel equipment (WF1948) 2-channel same value operation
setting/query :INSTrument:COUPle ........................................................................................... 150
2.3.12.3 2-channel equipment (WF1948) constant frequency difference mode: frequency difference
setting/query :CHANnel:DELTa................................................................................................. 151
2.3.12.4 2-channel equipment (WF1948) constant frequency ratio mode: frequency ratio
setting/query :CHANnel:RATio.................................................................................................. 152

2.3.13

Other Operations Command Details....................................................................................................... 153
2.3.13.1 Equipment-specific information query *IDN? ............................................................................. 153
2.3.13.2 Error message query :SYSTem:ERRor? ....................................................................................... 153
2.3.13.3 Setting initialization (status registers, etc. not cleared) *RST ..................................................... 153
2.3.13.4 Operation completion event bit setting *OPC .............................................................................. 154
2.3.13.5 Setting output key to 1 at operation completion *OPC?.............................................................. 154
2.3.13.6 Waiting for command/query execution *WAI ............................................................................. 154
2.3.13.7 Self diagnosis result query *TST? ................................................................................................. 154
2.3.13.8 External reference frequency input setting/query [:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:SOURce ...... 155
2.3.13.9 External reference frequency output setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:OUTPut[:STATe]....................................................................... 155

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

x

3.

2.4

Trigger/Oscillation Status Control .................................................................................................................. 156

2.5

System Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 157

Status System .............................................................................................................................................................. 159
3.1

Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register .......................................................................... 160

3.1.1

Status Byte Register................................................................................................................................... 161

3.1.2

Service Request Enable Register .............................................................................................................. 161

3.2

Standard Event Status Register Group.............................................................................................................. 162

3.2.1

Standard Event Status Register ................................................................................................................. 162

3.2.2

Standard Event Status Enable Register ..................................................................................................... 162

3.3
3.3.1

Operation Status Register Group / Questionable Data Status Register Group ............................................. 163
Overview of Registers ............................................................................................................................... 163
3.3.1.1 Condition register ............................................................................................................................. 163
3.3.1.2 Transition filter register .................................................................................................................... 163
3.3.1.3 Event register ................................................................................................................................... 164
3.3.1.4 Event enable register ....................................................................................................................... 164

3.3.2

Operation Status Register Group .............................................................................................................. 165
3.3.2.1 Continuous oscillation .................................................................................................................... 167
3.3.2.2 Modulation ....................................................................................................................................... 167
3.3.2.3 Sweep ............................................................................................................................................... 168
3.3.2.4 Burst ................................................................................................................................................. 169

3.3.3
3.4

Questionable Data Status Register Group .............................................................................................. 171
Warning Event Register Group......................................................................................................................... 172

3.4.1

Event register ............................................................................................................................................ 172

3.4.2

Event enable register.................................................................................................................................. 174

3.5

Others ................................................................................................................................................................ 174

4.

Error Message ............................................................................................................................................................. 175

5.

Specifications .............................................................................................................................................................. 179

6.

5.1

Interface Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 180

5.2

Response to Interface Message ....................................................................................................................... 180

5.3

Multi-Line Interface Message ........................................................................................................................... 181

Compatibility of External Control ............................................................................................................................. 183
6.1

Overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 184

6.1.1

External Control Interface (Compatibility with older WF194x series) ............................................... 185

6.1.2

General Differences in Commands (Compatibility with older WF194x series)................................. 187

6.1.3

Commands Subject to Restrictions (Compatibility with older WF194x series) ................................. 188

6.2
6.2.1
6.3

Older WF194x Series Commands Support List ............................................................................................ 190
Notes on Operations with External Control (Compatibility with older WF194x series) ................... 197
Descriptions of Individual Commands (Compatibility with older WF194x series) ................................... 198

6.3.1

AAC ........................................................................................................................................................... 199

6.3.2?AAP ......................................................................................................................................................... 199

6.3.3?AAV......................................................................................................................................................... 200

6.3.4

ACL ........................................................................................................................................................... 200

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)xi6.3.5

ACP ........................................................................................................................................................... 201

6.3.6

ADV/?ADV .............................................................................................................................................. 202

6.3.7

AFC/?AFC ................................................................................................................................................ 202

6.3.8

AFM/?AFM .............................................................................................................................................. 203

6.3.9

AFN/?AFN................................................................................................................................................ 204

6.3.10

AFQ/?AFQ................................................................................................................................................ 205

6.3.11?ALT.......................................................................................................................................................... 205

6.3.12

AMM/?AMM ........................................................................................................................................... 206

6.3.13

AMU/?AMU............................................................................................................................................. 206

6.3.14

AMV/?AMV............................................................................................................................................. 206

6.3.15?APP .......................................................................................................................................................... 207

6.3.16

APT/?APT................................................................................................................................................. 207

6.3.17

ARB ........................................................................................................................................................... 209

6.3.18ARW .......................................................................................................................................................... 209

6.3.19ASS ............................................................................................................................................................ 211

6.3.20

BEC/?BEC (WF1948) ............................................................................................................................. 211

6.3.21

BES/?BES ................................................................................................................................................. 212

6.3.22

BIR/?BIR................................................................................................................................................... 213

6.3.23

BRO/?BRO (WF1948) ............................................................................................................................ 213

6.3.24

BSS/?BSS.................................................................................................................................................. 214

6.3.25

BSV/?BSV ................................................................................................................................................ 214

6.3.26

BTY/?BTY................................................................................................................................................ 215

6.3.27

CDC (WF1948) ........................................................................................................................................ 215

6.3.28

CHA/?CHA (WF1948) ............................................................................................................................ 216

6.3.29

CLS ............................................................................................................................................................ 216

6.3.30

CMO/?CMO (WF1948) .......................................................................................................................... 217

6.3.31

CPL/?CPL (WF1948) .............................................................................................................................. 217

6.3.32

CTA/?CTA................................................................................................................................................ 217

6.3.33

CTE/?CTE................................................................................................................................................. 218

6.3.34

CTF/?CTF ................................................................................................................................................. 219

6.3.35

CTP/?CTP ................................................................................................................................................. 219

6.3.36

CTU/?CTU................................................................................................................................................ 220

6.3.37

DDV/?DDV .............................................................................................................................................. 220

6.3.38

DFC/?DFC ................................................................................................................................................ 221

6.3.39

DFQ/?DFQ................................................................................................................................................ 221

6.3.40

DTT/?DTT ................................................................................................................................................ 222

6.3.41

DTU/?DTU ............................................................................................................................................... 222

6.3.42

DTY/?DTY ............................................................................................................................................... 223

6.3.43

EAS/?EAS................................................................................................................................................. 223

6.3.44?ERR.......................................................................................................................................................... 224

6.3.45

ESE/?ESE.................................................................................................................................................. 224

6.3.46?ESR .......................................................................................................................................................... 225

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)xii

6.3.47

FDl/?FDl (WF1948) ................................................................................................................................. 225

6.3.48

FDV/?FDV................................................................................................................................................ 226

6.3.49FFC/?FFC.................................................................................................................................................. 226

6.3.50

FFQ/?FFQ ................................................................................................................................................. 226

6.3.51

FNC/?FNC ................................................................................................................................................ 227

6.3.52

FRA/?FRA (WF1948) ............................................................................................................................. 228

6.3.53

FRQ/?FRQ ................................................................................................................................................ 228

6.3.54

FRU/?FRU ................................................................................................................................................ 229

6.3.55

FSS............................................................................................................................................................. 229

6.3.56

GET ........................................................................................................................................................... 230

6.3.57

HDR/?HDR............................................................................................................................................... 230

6.3.58

HIV/?HIV.................................................................................................................................................. 231

6.3.59HLE/?HLE ................................................................................................................................................ 232

6.3.60

HVU/?HVU .............................................................................................................................................. 232

6.3.61?IDT ........................................................................................................................................................... 233

6.3.62

LOV/?LOV ............................................................................................................................................... 233

6.3.63

LVU/?LVU ............................................................................................................................................... 234

6.3.64

MCO/?MCO ............................................................................................................................................. 234

6.3.65

MDL .......................................................................................................................................................... 235

6.3.66

MDO/?MDO (WF1948) .......................................................................................................................... 235

6.3.67

MKA/?MKA............................................................................................................................................. 236

6.3.68

MKE/?MKE.............................................................................................................................................. 236

6.3.69

MKF/?MKF .............................................................................................................................................. 236

6.3.70

MKP/?MKP .............................................................................................................................................. 237

6.3.71

MKU/?MKU............................................................................................................................................. 237

6.3.72

MRK/?MRK ............................................................................................................................................. 237

6.3.73

MSK/?MSK .............................................................................................................................................. 239

6.3.74MTY/?MTY.............................................................................................................................................. 239

6.3.75?OC1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 240

6.3.76?OC2 (WF1948) ....................................................................................................................................... 241

6.3.77

ODV/?ODV .............................................................................................................................................. 242

6.3.78

OE1/?OE1 ................................................................................................................................................. 242

6.3.79OE2/?OE2 (WF1948) .............................................................................................................................. 242

6.3.80

OFC/?OFC)............................................................................................................................................... 243

6.3.81

OFQ/?OFQ................................................................................................................................................ 243

6.3.82

OFS/?OFS ................................................................................................................................................. 244

6.3.83

OFU/?OFU................................................................................................................................................ 244

6.3.84

OLD/?OLD ............................................................................................................................................... 246

6.3.85

OLS/?OLS................................................................................................................................................. 246

6.3.86

OMO/?OMO............................................................................................................................................. 247

6.3.87

OPC/?OPC ................................................................................................................................................ 247

6.3.88

ORG/?ORG............................................................................................................................................... 248

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)xiii

6.3.89?OSC.......................................................................................................................................................... 248

6.3.90

OSE/?OSE................................................................................................................................................. 249

6.3.91

OSS ............................................................................................................................................................ 250

6.3.92

PDV/?PDV................................................................................................................................................ 250

6.3.93

PFC/?PFC.................................................................................................................................................. 251

6.3.94

PFQ/?PFQ ................................................................................................................................................. 251

6.3.95

PHS/?PHS ................................................................................................................................................. 252

6.3.96

PHU/?PHU................................................................................................................................................ 252

6.3.97

POS/?POS ................................................................................................................................................. 253

6.3.98

PRD/?PRD ................................................................................................................................................ 253

6.3.99

PRU/?PRU ................................................................................................................................................ 254

6.3.100

PSC/?PSC.................................................................................................................................................. 254

6.3.101

PSS............................................................................................................................................................. 255

6.3.102

PST ............................................................................................................................................................ 255

6.3.103

PUW/?PUW.............................................................................................................................................. 256

6.3.104

PWU/?PWU.............................................................................................................................................. 256

6.3.105

RCL ........................................................................................................................................................... 257

6.3.106

RST ............................................................................................................................................................ 257

6.3.107

SEC/?SEC (WF1948) .............................................................................................................................. 257

6.3.108

SES/?SES .................................................................................................................................................. 258

6.3.109

SFC/?SFC.................................................................................................................................................. 258

6.3.110

SGS/?SGS ................................................................................................................................................. 259

6.3.111

SIG/?SIG ................................................................................................................................................... 260

6.3.112

SIR/?SIR.................................................................................................................................................... 260

6.3.113

SLS/?SLS .................................................................................................................................................. 260

6.3.114

SLV/?SLV................................................................................................................................................. 261

6.3.115

SMO/?SMO .............................................................................................................................................. 261

6.3.116

SNA/?SNA................................................................................................................................................ 262

6.3.117

SNE/?SNE................................................................................................................................................. 262

6.3.118

SNF/?SNF ................................................................................................................................................. 263

6.3.119

SNP/?SNP ................................................................................................................................................. 263

6.3.120

SNU/?SNU................................................................................................................................................ 263

6.3.121

SPA/?SPA ................................................................................................................................................. 264

6.3.122

SPC/?SPC.................................................................................................................................................. 265

6.3.123

SPE/?SPE .................................................................................................................................................. 265

6.3.124

SPF/?SPF................................................................................................................................................... 266

6.3.125

SPP/?SPP................................................................................................................................................... 266

6.3.126

SPU/?SPU ................................................................................................................................................. 267

6.3.127

SSC/?SSC.................................................................................................................................................. 267

6.3.128

STA/?STA................................................................................................................................................. 268

6.3.129

STE/?STE.................................................................................................................................................. 268

6.3.130

STF/?STF .................................................................................................................................................. 269

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)xiv

6.3.131

STM/?STM ............................................................................................................................................... 269

6.3.132

STO............................................................................................................................................................ 270

6.3.133

STP/?STP .................................................................................................................................................. 270

6.3.134?STS........................................................................................................................................................... 271

6.3.135

STT/?STT.................................................................................................................................................. 271

6.3.136

STU/?STU................................................................................................................................................. 271

6.3.137

STY/?STY................................................................................................................................................. 272

6.3.138

SWO/?SWO (WF1948) ........................................................................................................................... 272

6.3.139

SYN ........................................................................................................................................................... 273

6.3.140

SYT/?SYT................................................................................................................................................. 274

6.3.141

TRD/?TRD................................................................................................................................................ 275

6.3.142

TRE/?TRE................................................................................................................................................. 275

6.3.143

TRG/?TRG................................................................................................................................................ 276

6.3.144

TRS/?TRS ................................................................................................................................................. 277

6.3.145?TST .......................................................................................................................................................... 277

6.3.146

UAU/?UAU .............................................................................................................................................. 278

6.3.147

UDU/?UDU .............................................................................................................................................. 279

6.3.148

UFU/?UFU................................................................................................................................................ 280

6.3.149

UHU/?UHU .............................................................................................................................................. 281

6.3.150

UOU/?UOU .............................................................................................................................................. 282

6.3.151

UPU/?UPU................................................................................................................................................ 283

6.3.152

USS ............................................................................................................................................................ 284

6.3.153?VC1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 284

6.3.154?VC2 (WF1948) ....................................................................................................................................... 285

6.3.155

VE1/?VE1 ................................................................................................................................................. 286

6.3.156

VE2/?VE2 (WF1948) .............................................................................................................................. 286

6.3.157?VER ......................................................................................................................................................... 287

6.3.158?VSC.......................................................................................................................................................... 287

6.3.159

VSE/?VSE................................................................................................................................................. 288

6.3.160

WAI ........................................................................................................................................................... 289

6.3.161?WC1 ......................................................................................................................................................... 289

6.3.162?WC2 (WF1948) ...................................................................................................................................... 290

6.3.163

WE1/?WE1 ............................................................................................................................................... 290

6.3.164

WE2/?WE2 (WF1948) ............................................................................................................................ 291

6.3.165?WSC......................................................................................................................................................... 291

6.3.166

WSE/?WSE............................................................................................................................................... 292

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)xv

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)xvi

1. Preparations before Use
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

Overview of WF1947/WF1948 GPIB/USB Interface ·································································· 2
USB Preparations ············································································································· 2
GPIB Preparations ············································································································ 2
Selecting Interface············································································································· 3
GPIB Address Setting ········································································································ 5GPIB EOI Setting ············································································································· 6
USB ID ························································································································· 7
Releasing Remote State ······································································································ 7
Considerations ················································································································· 7

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1

1.1

Overview of WF1947/WF1948 GPIB/USB Interface

Almost all the functions of WF1947/WF1948 can be remotely set via the GPIB or USB interface. Moreover,the saved data and the settings can be transferred to an external device. This allows you to easily configure an
automatic measurement system.

1.2

USB Preparations

The WF1947/WF1948 can be controlled by NI-VISA from National Instruments Corporation . Almost all
panel operations can be controlled, and internal statuses, such as setting values and errors, can be read out.
Install a NI-VISA on the controlling computer, and connect it using a commercially available USB cable. The
installation file for this driver can be downloaded from the website of National Instruments Corporation. The
driver installation is described below.
1. Either search the NI-VISA page on the website of National Instruments Corporation.
2. Download the version of NI-VISA that supports your OS from the NI-VISA page.
3. Execute the downloaded file and install it.
4. Once the file has installed successfully, the NI-VISA is installed.
For details of NI-VISA, contact National Instruments Corporation or visit the National Instruments Website.

1.3

GPIB Preparations

Mount a GPIB controller board (card) to the controlling computer, then connect between them using acommercial GPIB cable. For details, see the instruction manual of your GPIB controller board (card).

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2

1.4

Selecting Interface

You can select whether the GPIB or the USB interface is to be used. WF1947/WF1948 cannot be controlledfrom the interface that is not selected. The selected interface is backed up even when the power is turned off.
"USB" is selected at shipping.
 Press the MENU key and then press the [Utility] soft-key.

 Select [Remote] and then press the ENTER key.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)3 Select [Interface] and then press the ENTER key to display the screen for selecting USB or GPIB.

CAUTION
When the computer recognizes WF1947/WF1948, if you switch the interface from USB to
GPIB or disconnect the USB cable, the computer may exhibit unexpected behavior.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

4

1.5

GPIB Address Setting

When you select the GPIB interface, you can set the GPIB address.
Set the GPIB address to a different value than the addresses of other devices connected with GPIB cable. The
set value is retained in the memory even when the power is turned off.
"2" is set at shipping.
 Set [Interface] to "GPIB" by performing step (1) to (3) described in "1.4 Selecting Interface." Select [GPIB Address] and then press the ENTER key to display the screen for setting the GPIB
address.
Enter the address by using the numeric keypad on the panel.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

5

1.6

GPIB EOI Setting

When you select the GPIB interface, you can switch the message terminator recognized by WF1947/WF1948.
The set value is retained in the memory even when the power is turned off.
"Enable" is set at shipping.
 Set [Interface] to "GPIB" by performing step (1) to (3) described in "1.4 Selecting Interface." Select [EOI] and then press the ENTER key to display the screen for switching the message terminatorrecognized.
･ Enable･ Disable: Recognizes the EOI signal, run the command that was entered.
: Recognizes the EOI signal, LF (without EOI signal) or CR+LF (without EOI signal), run
the command that was entered. However, it does not correspond to the binary datatransfer.

CAUTION
Please use as the EOI setting usually “Enable”

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

6

1.7

USB IDIf multiple units of WF1947/WF1948 are connected within a system via USB, the following numbers are used
to enable the application identify each unit.
• Vendor number• Product number• Serial number

1.8: 3402(0x0D4A): 13(0x000D)/WF1947, 14(0x000E)/WF1948: Product's manufacturing number (serial number)

Releasing Remote StateIn the external control remote state, the "USB" or "GPIB" icon is lit on the LCD, and "LOCAL" is displayed on
the [F5] soft-key. When the [F5] key is pressed in this state, the remote state is released and the panel
operations become enabled. If "LOCAL" is not displayed (local lockout status), the [F5] key operation isdisabled. To enable the panel operations, specify the local control from the external control controller.

1.9

Considerations• The USB and GPIB connectors are located on the rear panel.
• The USB and GPIB interfaces are expected to be used under a relatively stable environment.
Avoid using in a place that has power fluctuation or environment with much electrical noise.
• Connect or disconnect the GPIB connector only after all devices connected on the bus are powered off.
• When using the GPIB interface, power on all devices connected on the bus.
•The total cable length must be 2 m x (number of devices) or 20 m, whichever is the shorter.
• The length of a single cable must be 4 m or shorter.
• Check carefully for the GPIB address before setting it.
If a duplicate address is set to multiple units within the same system, the equipment may be damaged.
• When using the GPIB interface, set EOI with the controller of the GPIB connected with the equipment.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)7

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

82. Command Descriptions
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Overview of Commands ··································································································· 10
Command List ··············································································································· 23
Descriptions of Individual Commands ·················································································· 41
Trigger/Oscillation Status Control······················································································· 156
System Unit ················································································································· 157

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

9

2.1

Overview of Commands

The commands of WF1947/WF1948 comply with IEEE488.2 and SCPI (version 1999.0). SCPI defines thecommunication method used between controllers and measurement equipment. For general information about
SCPI, refer to other appropriate documents.

2.1.1 Conventions
For convenience in describing the commands, the following conventions are used in this document.
<>< > indicates something other than itself. In the case of parameter or response data, theabbreviation of the type is enclosed in < > .

[]The items enclosed in [ ] are optional, and can be omitted.

{abc|xyz}
Indicates that either "abc" or "xyz" can be used.
[abc|xyz]
Indicates that either "abc" or "xyz" can be used,
but that both are optional and can be omitted.
Uppercase, lowercase
Keywords in a mixture of uppercase and lowercase letters are the long form, while keywords inuppercase letters only are the short form.

2.1.2 Commands
The program messages of WF1947/WF1948 consist of common commands and subsystem commands. Thissection describes the format of each command, the subsystem command tree, and so on.

2.1.2.1

Common commands

The common commands are to control the comprehensive functions of the equipment.
Figure 2.1 shows the syntax of common commands.

KeywordSP

Parameter?
Figure 2.1

Common Command Syntax

The keyword in Figure 2.1 consists of three alphabetic characters. Here, SP is a space character (ASCII code32).

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

102.1.2.2

Subsystem commands

The subsystem commands are used to execute specific functions of the equipment. Each subsystem commandconsists of a root keyword, one or more lower-level keywords, a parameter, and a suffix.
The followings show examples of command and query.

:OUTPut:STATe ON:OUTPut:STATe?

OUTPut is the root-level keyword linking a second-level keyword, and ON is a parameter.

2.1.2.3

Subsystem command tree(A) Structure of command tree
In SCPI, a hierarchical structure similar to the one used in a file system is used for the subsystem commands.
This command structure is called "command tree."Figure 2.2 shows an example of a command tree of subsystem commands.

root[:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel]:FREQuency[:FIXed][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:OFFSET:PHASe[:OUTPut][:STATe][:SYSTem]:ERRorFigure 2.2

Example of Subsystem Command TreeIn the command tree in Figure 2.2, the keywords nearest the top ([:SOURce], [:OUTPut], and [:SYSTem]) areroot level keywords, and to reach the keywords on the lower levels, a specific path must be followed. For
example, to access ":OFFSet", the path must be [:SOURce] - :VOLTage - [:LEVel] - [:IMMediate] - :OFFSet.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)11(B) Current path movement
The current path is a level within the command tree, and becomes the first level from which the parser starts thesearch when the user sends the next command. The parser determines the current path according to thefollowing rules.
(1) At power-on and reset
The current path is set to the root.
(2) Message terminator
Upon reception of a message terminator, the current path is set to the root.
(3) Colon (command separator)
When a colon is placed between two keywords, the colon moves the current path one level down in thecommand tree.
(4) Colon (root specifier)When a colon is placed at the beginning of a command, the current path is set to the root.
(5) Semicolon
Semicolons do not affect to the current path.
(6) SpaceSpaces do not affect to the current path.
(7) Comma
Commas do not affect to the current path.
(8) IEEE488.2 common commands
Common commands do not affect to the current path.
By using semicolons properly, multiple commands can be sent efficiently.
For example,:SOURce:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 1.0; OFFSet 1.0

is the same as sending the following two commands::SOURce:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 1.0:SOURce:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet 1.0

When an optional keyword is omitted, you should pay careful attention to the current path movement.
For example,:VOLTage 1.0

sets the current path to ":SOURce." Therefore, if following two program messages:SOURce:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 1.0:SOURce:FREQuency:FIXed 1000.0

are send as one program message,:SOURce:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 1.0; FREQuency:FIXed 1000.0
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

12results in an error. However,:SOURce:VOLTage 1.0; FREQuency:FIXed 1000.0

does not result in an error.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

132.1.2.4

Subsystem command syntax

The syntax of subsystem commands is shown in Figure 2.3.

,:

Keyword:SP

Parameter

Suffix?

Figure 2.3

Subsystem Command Syntax(A) Keyword
The keyword in Figure 2.3 is a string of up to 12 characters consisting of uppercase and lowercase alphabetic
characters, underscore (_), and numeric characters, beginning with an alphabetic character.
Most of the keywords listed in "2.2 Command List" consist of a mixture of uppercase and lowercase letters.
Here, uppercase letters indicate the short form of keywords, while uppercase and lowercase letters indicate thelong form of keywords. Keywords are written in uppercase and lowercase letter for convenience, but actualcommands are not case sensitive. Examples for the keyword "OUTPut" are listed in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1

Keywords Accepted and Not Accepted by Equipment (for "OUTPut")

Keyword

Description

OUTPUTCan be used as long form.

OUTP

Can be used as short form.

OuTpUtNot case sensitive. Can be used as long form.

oUtP

Not case sensitive. Can be used as short form.

OUTPU

Cannot be used because it corresponds to neither long form nor short
form.

OUT

Cannot be used because it corresponds to neither long form nor shortform.

(B) Keyword separator
The colons (:) in Figure 2.3 are interpreted as keyword separators. These keyword separators serve to separate
an upper-level keyword from a lower-level keyword in a command tree as shown in Figure 2.2.
The colon (:) at the beginning of the subsystem command is interpreted as a root specifier. This root specifiersets the current path to the root.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

14(C) Keyword omission
The keywords enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) in the commands listed in "2.2 Command List" can be omitted.
If omitted, the equipment interprets the command as if that optional keyword is received.
For example,:OUTPut[:STATe]means that you can use either of the following commands::OUTPut:STATe:OUTPut(D) Channel specification
In the case of a 2-channel equipment, many commands allow you to specify the channel by using an optional
numeric keyword suffix.
For example,:OUTPut[1|2]:STATe

means commands for channel 1 and 2 as follows::OUTPut[1]:STATe:OUTPut2:STATe

If no channel number is specified, [1] is considered to be omitted, and the command is interpreted as thecommand for channel 1. For example, to control the channel 1 output to be turned ON, you can use either ofthe following commands.

:OUTPut1:STATe ON:OUTPut:STATe ON

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

15(E) Parameters
Parameter types are described below.
(1) Numeric parameter (<REAL>, <INT>)
The syntax of numeric parameters is shown in Figure 2.4.

Mantissa

Figure 2.4

Index

SP

Numeric Parameter (<REAL>, <INT>) Syntax

The syntaxes of the mantissa and index in Figure 2.4 are shown in Figure 2.5 and 2.6.

Digit

.

Digit

Digit

.
Digit
Figure 2.5

Mantissa Syntax

Digit

E/e
SP

Figure 2.6

Index Syntax(2) Discrete Parameter (<DISC>)
The syntax of the discrete parameter is shown in Figure 2.7.

Selection 1

Selection 2

Selection 3

Selection N

Figure 2.7

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Discrete Parameter (<DISC>) Syntax

16

(3) Boolean Value Parameter (<BOL>)
The syntax of the Boolean value parameter is shown in Figure 2.8.

NUM

ON

OFF

Figure 2.8

Boolean Value Parameter (<BOL>) Syntax

The Boolean value parameter is interpreted as true for values other than 0, and as false for 0 (zero). If thespecified value includes a fractional part, that value is interpreted as the whole number obtained by rounding
the fractional part. Therefore, for example, "0.4" is false, and "0.5" is true.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)17(4) String parameter (<STR>)
The syntax of string parameters is shown in Figure 2.9.

‘ (character)

Characterother than ‘“(character)

Characterother than “Figure 2.9

String Parameter (<STR>) Syntax(5) Block parameter (<BLK>)
The syntax of block parameters is shown in Figure 2.10.

Digit otherthan 00

Figure 2.10

Digit

Byte data

Byte data

NL

^END

Block Parameter (<BLK>) Syntax

In the figure, NL is a new line character (ASCII code 10), and ^END is an EOI asserted by the last byte.
(F) Parameter separator
Parameter separators are used to separate parameters in a command which have two or more parameters.
(G) Query parameter
A query parameter is specified after "?" of query, and can be used for most of queries supported by thecommands that have numeric parameters. For example, "MINimum" or "MAXimum" is specified as queryparameter, the settable minimum value or settable maximum value can be queried, respectively.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)18

(H) Suffix
The syntax of suffix is shown in Figure 2.11.

PrefixSP

Figure 2.11

Unit

Suffix Syntax

In WF1947/WF1948, the prefix and unit attached to a parameter are valid only for that command, and do notaffect other commands.
:SOURce1:VOLTage:AMPLitude:UNIT VRMS
:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 2.0:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 2.0VPP

2.1.2.5

Sets the amplitude unit to Vrms
Sets the amplitude to 2.0Vrms
Sets the amplitude to 2.0Vp-p

Program message syntax

Two or more common commands and subsystem commands can be combined and sent from the controller tothe equipment as one program message. The syntax of the program message is shown in Figure 2.12.

;^END
Commoncommand

NL^END

Subsystem
commandNL
Figure 2.12

Program Message Syntax

Commands are separated by a semicolon (;).

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

192.1.2.6

Response message syntax

A response message is the data that is transmitted from the equipment in response to a query.
(A) Response message syntax
The syntax of the response message is shown in Figure 2.13.

;,
Response
data

Figure 2.13

NL

^END

Response Message Syntax

In response messages, commas (,) and semicolons (;) are used as separators. When multiple values are returned
by one command, the data are separated by commas (,). On the other hand, when there are multiple queries in
one program message, the data for each query are separated by semicolons (;).
(B) Response message data
The data types of response messages are as follows.
(1) Real number response data (<REAL>)
The syntax of the real number response data is shown in Figure 2.14.

<NR2>

<NR3>
Figure 2.14

Real Number Response Data (<REAL>) Syntax

The syntax of the NR2 number response data is shown in Figure 2.15.

Digit

Figure 2.15

,

Digit

NR2 Number Response Data (<NR2>) Syntax

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

20

The syntax of the NR3 number response data is shown in Figure 2.16.

Digit

Digit

.

Digit

E

Figure 2.16

NR3 Number Response Data (<NR3>) Syntax(2) Integer response data (<INT>)
The syntax of the integer response data is shown in Figure 2.17.

Digit

Figure 2.17

Integer Response Data (<INT>) Syntax(3) Discrete response data (<DISC>)
The syntax of the discrete response data is shown in Figure 2.18.

Selection 1

Selection 2

Selection 3

Selection N

Figure 2.18

Discrete Response Data (<DISC>) Syntax

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)21

(4) Numeric Boolean value response data (<NBOL>)
The syntax of the numeric Boolean value response data is shown in Figure 2.19.

0
1
Figure 2.19

Numeric Boolean Value Response Data (<NBOL>) Syntax(5) String response data (<STR>)
The syntax of the string response data is shown in Figure 2.20.

“(character)

Characterother than “Figure 2.20

String Response Data (<STR>) Syntax(6) Definite length arbitrary block response data (<DBLK>)
The syntax of the definite length arbitrary block response data is shown in Figure 2.21.

Digit otherthan 0Figure 2.21

Digit

Byte data

Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data (<DBLK>) Syntax(7) Indefinite length arbitrary block response data (<IBLK>)
The syntax of the indefinite length arbitrary block response data is shown in Figure 2.22.

0Figure 2.22

Byte data

NL

^END

Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data (<IBLK>) Syntax

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

22

2.2

Command List

This section shows the list of the external control commands of WF1947/WF1948.

2.2.1 List Classification
The commands are listed according to the following classification.

Basic output signal settings•Oscillation mode selection Command list
•Output waveform selection Command list
•Individual output waveform setting
Command list
•Output signal setting
Command list

Signal output control•Signal output operation
Command list
•Trigger operation Command list

Advanced settings for each oscillation mode
•Modulated oscillation mode Command list
•Sweep oscillation mode Command list
•Burst oscillation mode Command list

Memory save/read operations•Memory operations

Command list

Commands related to external control status system•Status system

Command list

Commands dedicated to 2-channel equipment WF1948•Channel operation

2-channel equipment (WF1948)

Command list

Other commands for information acquisition, etc.
•Other operations Command list

2.2.2 Notations in Lists"Reference" indicates the section number where each command is described in detail.
"Processing time" indicates the typical time for command processing by this equipment.
The actual processing time depends on the operation status of this equipment and the speed of the controller(PC).
So please verify the system sufficiently before performing the external control.
In the table, the processing time for a setting command is the time from the transmission of the command to thereflection on the behavior of the equipment, and the processing time for a query command is the time from thetransmission of the command to the reception of the response message by the controller (PC).
The meanings of the symbols used in the command list table are as follows.
The lowercase part of each keyword indicates that the part can be omitted.
•Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional keywords. (implicit keywords)•Vertical bars ( | ) indicate that one of multiple keywords can be selected.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

232.2.3 Oscillation Mode Selection Command List
Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Continuous oscillation mode
selection[:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous[:IMMediate]2.3.1.1

90/–

90/–

Continuous oscillation mode
query[:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous:STATe?

2.3.1.2

–/10

–/15

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:STATe

2.3.1.3

100/10100/15Modulated oscillation mode PSK
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:STATe

2.3.1.4

100/10100/15Modulated oscillation mode FM
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:STATe

2.3.1.5

100/10100/10Modulated oscillation mode PM
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:STATe

2.3.1.6

100/10100/15Modulated oscillation mode AM
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:STATe

2.3.1.7

100/10100/10Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:STATe

2.3.1.8

100/10100/10Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:STATe

2.3.1.9

100/10100/20Modulated oscillation mode PWM
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:STATe

2.3.1.10 120/10

120/10Sweep oscillation mode
selection/query

sweep[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:MODE

2.3.1.11

15/10

15/15

Sweep oscillation mode
sweep
selection/query

frequency[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:MODE

2.3.1.12 180/10

180/15

Sweep oscillation mode phase sweep
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:MODE

2.3.1.13 190/10

190/15

Sweep oscillation mode
sweep
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.1.14 230/15[:AMPLitude]:MODE

230/20Sweep oscillation mode
DC offset sweep
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.1.15 230/15:OFFSet:MODE

230/20Sweep oscillation mode
duty sweep
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:MODE

2.3.1.16 250/15

250/15Burst oscillation mode
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:STATe

2.3.1.17 100/10

100/10amplitude

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

242.2.4 Output Waveform Selection Command List
Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.2.1

300/10300/15

Arbitrary waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.2.2

25/10

25/15

Waveform polarity selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:POLarity

2.3.2.3

100/10100/15

Amplitude range selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SCALe

2.3.2.4

100/10100/15

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

25

2.2.5 Individual Output Waveform Setting Command List
Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Square/pulse wave shared commands
Square/pulse wave shared commands
duty unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT

2.3.3.1

10/15

10/15

Square/pulse wave shared commands
duty user-defined unit
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:USER

2.3.3.2

15/20

15/15

Square wave
duty value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle

2.3.3.3

20/15

20/15

Square wave
extension on/off selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend

2.3.3.4

15/10

20/15

Pulse wave
duty value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle

2.3.3.5

65/15

45/20

Pulse wave
pulse width setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:WIDTh

2.3.3.6

65/10

45/20

Pulse wave
rising time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]

2.3.3.7

35/10

30/15

Pulse wave
falling time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling2.3.3.8

25/10

25/15

Pulse wave
period setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod

2.3.3.9

95/15

75/20

Pulse wave
period unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT

2.3.3.10

10/10

10/10

Pulse wave
period user-defined unit
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:USER

2.3.3.11

15/15

20/15

[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry

2.3.3.12

30/10

30/15

Square wave

Pulse wave

Ramp wave
Ramp wave
symmetry setting/query

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

26

2.2.6 Output Signal Setting Command List
Function

Refer
ence

CommandProcessing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Frequency
Frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]

2.3.4.1

45/10

45/15

Frequency unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:UNIT

2.3.4.2

10/10

10/15

Frequency
user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:USER

2.3.4.3

15/15

15/15

Amplitude setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.4[:AMPLitude]

95/10

95/15

Amplitude unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.5[:AMPLitude]:UNIT

10/10

10/15

Amplitudeuser-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.6[:AMPLitude]:USER

15/15

20/15

DC offset setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.7:OFFSet

95/15

95/10

DC offset
unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.8:OFFSet:UNIT

10/10

10/15

DC Offset
user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.9:OFFSet:USER

15/15

20/15

Phase setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe[:ADJust]

2.3.4.10

20/15

20/15

Phase unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:UNIT

2.3.4.11

10/10

10/15

Phase
user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:USER

2.3.4.12

15/15

15/15

Amplitude

DC offset

Phase

Output voltage range (Switching setting between amplitude and DC offset)
Output voltage range
high level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.13
:HIGH

70/15

70/15

Output voltage range
high level unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.14:HIGH:UNIT

10/10

10/15

Output voltage range
low level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.15 145/15:LOW

145/20

Output voltage range
low level unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.4.16:LOW:UNIT

10/15

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

10/10

27

2.2.7 Signal Output Operation Command List
Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Output on/off
setting/query:OUTPut[1|2][:STATe]

2.3.5.1

15/10

15/15

Output-on at power-on
setting/query:OUTPut[1|2]:PON

2.3.5.2

220/10335/10Auto-range operation (output range)
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO

2.3.5.3

70/10

70/15

Phase synchronization setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:INITiate

2.3.5.4

45/–

45/–

External addition input setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:COMBine:FEED

2.3.5.5

65/10

65/10

Load impedance
setting/query:OUTPut[1|2]:LOAD

2.3.5.6

260/10260/10Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

2.2.8 Trigger Operation Command List
Function

CommandManual trigger operation
Manual trigger (TRIG key
operation)*TRG

2.3.6.1

10/–

10/–

Trigger operation sweep mode
trigger source selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SOURce

2.3.6.2

15/10

15/15

Trigger operation sweep modeinternal trigger cycle setting/query:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:TIMer

2.3.6.3

10/10

15/15

Trigger operation sweep mode
external trigger signal polarity
selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SLOPe

2.3.6.4

10/10

10/10

Trigger operation burst mode
trigger source selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SOURce

2.3.6.5

10/10

10/15

Trigger operation burst modeinternal trigger cycle setting/query:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:TIMer

2.3.6.6

10/10

15/15

Trigger operation burst mode
external trigger signal polarity
selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SLOPe

2.3.6.7

10/10

10/10

2.3.6.8

30/-

30/-

Trigger operation sweep mode

Trigger operation burst mode

Trigger operation execution control
Trigger operation execution control
setting:TRIGger[1|2]:SELected:EXECute

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

28

2.2.9 Modulated Oscillation Mode

Command List
Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Command

Refer
ence

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation degree setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM[:DEPTh]

2.3.7.1

10/10

15/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:SOURce

2.3.7.2

10/10

15/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.3

20/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.7.4

10/10

10/10

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation waveform - arbitrary
waveform
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.7.5

25/10

25/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM
synchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AM:TYPE

2.3.7.6

10/10

10/10

Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
modulation degree setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC[:DEPTh]

2.3.7.7

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:SOURce

2.3.7.8

10/10

15/10

Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.9

20/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.7.10

10/10

10/10

Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
modulation waveform - arbitrary
waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.7.11

25/10

30/15

Modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
synchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE

2.3.7.12

10/10

10/10

FunctionAM

AM (DSB-SC)WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

29

Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

FM
Modulated oscillation mode FM
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM[:DEViation]

2.3.7.13

25/15

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:SOURce

2.3.7.14

15/10

15/10

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.15

15/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.7.16

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation waveform - arbitrary
waveform
selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.7.17

25/10

35/15

Modulated oscillation mode FM
synchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FM:TYPE

2.3.7.18

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
hop frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey[:FREQuency]

2.3.7.19

10/15

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:SOURce

2.3.7.20

10/10

15/15

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.21

20/15

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
synchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FSKey:TYPE

2.3.7.22

10/10

10/10

Modulated oscillation mode PM
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM[:DEViation]

2.3.7.23

20/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:SOURce

2.3.7.24

10/10

20/10

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.25

15/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.7.26

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation waveform - arbitrary
waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.7.27

25/10

35/15

Modulated oscillation mode PMsynchronization output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PM:TYPE

2.3.7.28

10/10

15/15

FSK

PM

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)30

Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

PSK
Modulated oscillation mode PSK
deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey[:DEViation]

2.3.7.29

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:SOURce

2.3.7.30

20/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.31

20/10

20/15

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
synchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PSKey:TYPE

2.3.7.32

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle

2.3.7.33

25/15

25/15

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:SOURce

2.3.7.34

10/10

15/10

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.35

15/15

15/15

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.7.36

10/10

10/15

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation waveform - arbitrary
waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.7.37

25/10

25/15

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
synchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PWM:TYPE

2.3.7.38

10/10

10/10

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM[:DEViation]

2.3.7.39

65/15

65/15

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:SOURce

2.3.7.40

10/10

15/10

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FREQuency

2.3.7.41

15/15

15/15

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]

2.3.7.42

10/10

10/10

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
modulation waveform - arbitrary
waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER

2.3.7.43

25/10

25/15

PWM

DC offset modulation

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)31

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulationsynchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:OFSM:TYPE

2.2.10 Sweep Oscillation Mode
Function

2.3.7.44

10/10

10/10

Command List
Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Basic sweep setting
Basic sweep setting
sweep slope selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SPACing

2.3.8.1

10/10

10/15

Basic sweep setting
sweep direction selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion

2.3.8.2

10/10

10/15

Basic sweep setting
sweep time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:TIME

2.3.8.3

15/10

10/15

Basic sweep setting
stop level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel

2.3.8.4

10/10

10/15

Basic sweep setting
stop level selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe

2.3.8.5

10/10

10/15

Basic sweep setting
oscillation stop unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:OSTop

2.3.8.6

10/10

10/15

Frequency sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STARt

2.3.8.7

20/15

20/15

Frequency sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STOP

2.3.8.8

20/15

20/15

Frequency sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:CENTer

2.3.8.9

20/15

20/15

Frequency sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SPAN

2.3.8.10

20/15

20/15

Frequency sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:FREQuency

2.3.8.11

15/15

15/15

Frequency sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SWAP

2.3.8.12

25/–

15/–

Frequency sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STATe

2.3.8.13

10/–

15/–

Frequency sweep

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

32

Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Phase sweep
Phase sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STARt

2.3.8.14

20/15

20/15

Phase sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STOP

2.3.8.15

20/15

20/15

Phase sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:CENTer

2.3.8.16

20/15

20/15

Phase sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SPAN

2.3.8.17

20/15

20/15

Phase sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PHASe

2.3.8.18

15/15

15/15

Phase sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SWAP

2.3.8.19

15/–

20/–

Phase sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STATe

2.3.8.20

10/–

15/–

Amplitude sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.21[:AMPLitude]:STARt

20/15

20/20

Amplitude sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.22[:AMPLitude]:STOP

20/15

20/20

Amplitude sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.23[:AMPLitude]:CENTer

20/15

25/20

Amplitude sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.24[:AMPLitude]:SPAN

20/15

20/20

Amplitude sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]

2.3.8.25

20/15

20/20

Amplitude sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.26[:AMPLitude]:SWAP

20/–

20/–

Amplitude sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.27[:AMPLitude]:STATe

15/–

15/–

Amplitude sweep

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

33

Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

DC offset sweep
DC offset sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.28:OFFSet:STARt

20/20

20/20

DC offset sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.29:OFFSet:STOP

20/15

20/20

DC offset sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.30:OFFSet:CENTer

20/15

20/20

DC offset sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.31:OFFSet:SPAN

20/15

20/20

DC offset sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet

2.3.8.32

15/20

15/20

DC offset sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.33:OFFSet:SWAP

20/–

20/–

DC offset sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate] 2.3.8.34:OFFSet:STATe

15/–

15/–

Duty sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt

2.3.8.35

20/15

20/15

Duty sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP

2.3.8.36

20/15

20/15

Duty sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer

2.3.8.37

20/15

20/15

Duty sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN

2.3.8.38

20/15

20/15

Duty sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PULSe:DCYCle

2.3.8.39

20/15

20/15

Duty sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SWAP

2.3.8.40

20/–

20/–

Duty sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe

2.3.8.41

10/–

10/–

Duty sweep

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

34

2.2.11 Burst Oscillation Mode

Command List

Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Burst oscillation
Burst oscillation
burst mode selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:MODE

2.3.9.1

10/10

10/10

Burst oscillation
stop level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel

2.3.9.2

10/10

10/15

Burst oscillation
stop level selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel:STATe

2.3.9.3

10/10

10/10

Burst oscillationsynchronization signal output
selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:BURSt:TYPE

2.3.9.4

10/10

10/10

Burst oscillation
auto burst mode: mark wave number
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:NCYCles

2.3.9.5

10/10

10/15

Burst oscillation
auto burst mode: space wave number
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:SPACe

2.3.9.6

10/10

10/10

Burst oscillation
trigger burst mode: mark wave
numbersetting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:NCYCles

2.3.9.7

10/10

10/15

Burst oscillation
trigger burst mode: trigger delay time
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:TDELay

2.3.9.8

10/10

15/15

Burst oscillationgate mode: oscillation stop unit
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:GATE:OSTop

2.3.9.9

10/10

10/15

Burst oscillation
triggered gate mode: oscillation stop
unit
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:TGATe:OSTop

2.3.9.10

10/10

10/10

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

35

2.2.12 Memory Operation Command List
Function

Command

Refer
ence

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Basic setting memory
Basic setting memory clear:MEMory:STATe:DELete

2.3.10.1

700/–

700/–

Basic setting memory store*SAV

2.3.10.2

900/–

900/–

Basic setting memory recall*RCL

2.3.10.3

250/–

250/–

450/5028000/
7000
250/202200/
150

820/150
41000/
22000
370/253100/
1200

Arbitrary waveform memory
Arbitrary waveform memory
arbitrary waveform datatransfer/read-out{:TRACe|DATA}[:DATA]

2.3.10.4

Array format (4 K-word)
Array format (512 K-word)
Control point format (10-point)
Control point format (10,000-point)

Arbitrary waveform memory store{:TRACe|DATA}:STORe

2.3.10.5

540/–

660/–

Arbitrary waveform memory recall{:TRACe|DATA}:RECall

2.3.10.6

50/–

50/–

Arbitrary waveform memory copy{:TRACe|DATA}:COPY

2.3.10.7

380/–

540/–

Arbitrary waveform memory delete{:TRACe|DATA}:DELete

2.3.10.8

600/–

620/–

Arbitrary waveform memory
information acquisition{:TRACe|DATA}:INFormation?

2.3.10.9

–/35

–/20

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)36

2.2.13 Status System

Command List

Function

CommandReference

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Status operations
Status register and related queue
clear

*CLS

2.3.11.1

105/–

100/–

Status reporting relatedpreset setting:STATus:PRESet

2.3.11.2

10/–

10/–

Status register at power-on
clear flag setting/query*PSC

2.3.11.3

10/10

10/10

Status byte register
query

*STB?

2.3.11.4

–/10

–/10

Service request enable registersetting/query*SRE

2.3.11.5

10/10

10/10

Standard event status register query*ESR?

2.3.11.6

–/10

–/10

Standard event enable registersetting/query*ESE

2.3.11.7

10/10

10/10

Operation status register group (common to CH1/CH2)
Condition register query:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?

2.3.11.8

–/10

–/10

Transition filter register (negative)
setting/query:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition

2.3.11.9

10/10

10/10

Transition filter register (positive)
setting/query:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition

2.3.11.10

10/10

10/10

Event register query:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.11

–/10

–/10

Event enable registersetting/query:STATus:OPERation:ENABle

2.3.11.12

10/10

10/10

Operation status register group (CH1)
Operation status register group (CH1)
condition register query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:CONDition?

2.3.11.13

–/10

–/10

Operation status register group (CH1)transition filter register (negative)
setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:NTRansition

2.3.11.14

10/10

10/10

Operation status register group (CH1)transition filter register (positive)
setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:PTRansition

2.3.11.15

10/10

10/15

Operation status register group (CH1)
event register query:STATus:OPERation:CH1[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.16

–/10

–/10

Operation status register group (CH1)
event enable registersetting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle

2.3.11.17

10/10

10/10

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

37

Function

CommandReference

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Operation status register group (CH2)
Operation status register group (CH2)
condition register query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:CONDition?

2.3.11.18

–/10

–/15

Operation status register group (CH2)transition filter register (negative)
setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:NTRansition

2.3.11.19

10/10

10/10

Operation status register group (CH2)transition filter register (positive)
setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:PTRansition

2.3.11.20

10/10

10/10

Operation status register group (CH2)
event Register setting:STATus:OPERation:CH2[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.21

–/10

–/15

Operation status register group (CH2)
event enable registersetting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle

2.3.11.22

10/10

10/15

Questionable data status register group
Questionable data status register groupcondition register query:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?

2.3.11.23

–/10

–/10

Questionable data status register grouptransition filter register (negative)
setting/query:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition

2.3.11.24

10/10

10/15

Questionable data status register grouptransition filter register (positive)
setting/query:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition

2.3.11.25

10/10

10/10

Questionable data status register groupevent register query:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.26

–/10

–/10

Questionable data status register groupevent enable registersetting/query:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle

2.3.11.27

10/10

10/10

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)38

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

CommandReference

Warning event register groupevent register query:STATus:WARNing[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.28

–/10

–/10

Warning event register groupevent enable registersetting/query:STATus:WARNing:ENABle

2.3.11.29

10/10

10/10

Function

Warning event register group

Warning event register group (CH1)
Warning event register group (CH1)
event register query:STATus:WARNing:CH1[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.30

–/10

–/10

Warning event register group (CH1)
event enable registersetting/query:STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle

2.3.11.31

10/10

10/15

Warning event register group (CH2)
Warning event register group (CH2)
event register query:STATus:WARNing:CH2[:EVENt]?

2.3.11.32

–/10

–/10

Warning event register group (CH2)
event enable registersetting/query:STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle

2.3.11.33

10/10

10/10

2.2.14 Channel Operation 2-channel Equipment (WF1948) Command List
Function

CommandReference

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

2-channel equipment (WF1948)
channel mode setting/query:CHANnel:MODE

2.3.12.1

345/10345/102-channel equipment (WF1948)
2-channel same value operation
setting/query:INSTrument:COUPle

2.3.12.2

20/10

20/15

2-channel equipment (WF1948)
constant frequency difference mode:
frequency difference
setting/query:CHANnel:DELTa

2.3.12.3

250/10250/152-channel equipment (WF1948)
constant frequency ratio mode:
frequency ratio
setting/query:CHANnel:RATio

2.3.12.4

490/10485/10

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)39

2.2.15 Other Operations

Command List

Function

CommandReference

Processing time [ms]Setting/Query
USB
GPIB

Equipment-specific information query*IDN?

2.3.13.1

–/10

–/15

Error message query:SYSTem:ERRor?

2.3.13.2

–/10

–/15

Setting initialization(status registers, etc. not cleared)*RST

2.3.13.3

330/–

330/–

Operation completion event bit setting*OPC

2.3.13.4

10/–

10/–

Setting output key to 1 at operation
completion*OPC?

2.3.13.5

–/10

–/10

Waiting for command/query execution*WAI

2.3.13.6

10/–

10/–

Self diagnosis result query*TST?

2.3.13.7

–/10

–/10

External reference frequency input
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:SOURce

2.3.13.8

15/10

15/15

External reference frequency output
setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:OUTPut[:STATe]

2.3.13.9

15/10

15/15

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

40

2.3

Descriptions of Individual Commands

This section describes the details of each command.

2.3.1 Oscillation Mode Selection Command Details
2.3.1.1

Continuous oscillation mode selection[:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous[:IMMediate]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous[:IMMediate]
Description
Sets the oscillation mode to the continuous oscillation
Setting parameter
None
Setting example:SOURce1:CONTinuous:IMMediate
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to the continuous oscillation

2.3.1.2

Continuous oscillation mode query[:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous:STATe?
□[:SOURce[1|2]]:CONTinuous:STATe?
Description
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the continuous oscillation
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the continuous oscillation mode
1 : The oscillation mode is the continuous oscillation mode
Remarks
If you want to switch to the continuous oscillation without being affected by the oscillation
mode set at that time, use this command to switch to the continuous oscillation mode.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

41

2.3.1.3

Modulated oscillation mode
FSK selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode FSKQueries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode FSK
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode FSK
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (FSK)
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode FSK
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode FSK
Setting example:SOURce1:FSKey:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to FSK

2.3.1.4

Modulated oscillation mode
PSK selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode PSKQueries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode PSK
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode PSK
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (PSK)
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode PSK
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode PSK
Setting example:SOURce1:FSKey:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to PSK

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

422.3.1.5

Modulated oscillation mode
FM selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode FM
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode FM
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode FM
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (FM)Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode FM
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode FM
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to FM

2.3.1.6

Modulated oscillation mode
PM selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode PM
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode PM
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode PM
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (PM)Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode PM
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode PM
Setting example:SOURce1:PM:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to PM

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

43

2.3.1.7

Modulated oscillation mode
AM selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode AM
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode AM
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode AM
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (AM)Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode AM
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode AM
Setting example:SOURce1:AM:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to AM

2.3.1.8

Modulated oscillation mode
AM (DSB-SC) selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation AM (DSB-SC)
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> →WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode AM(DSB-SC)

44

Setting example:SOURce1:AMSC:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to AM (DSB-SC)

2.3.1.9

Modulated oscillation mode
DC offset modulation selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (DC offset
modulation)
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode DC
offset modulation
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode DC offset
modulation
Setting example:SOURce1:OFSM:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to the DC offset modulation

2.3.1.10

Modulated oscillation mode
PWM selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the modulated oscillation mode PWM
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode PWM
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Switches to the continuous oscillation mode if the oscillation
mode is the modulated oscillation mode PWM
1/ON: Switches the oscillation mode to the modulation (PWM)
Query parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)45

Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not the modulated oscillation mode PWM
1 : The oscillation mode is the modulated oscillation mode PWM
Setting example:SOURce1:PWM:STATe ON
Switches the oscillation mode of CH1 to PWM

2.3.1.11

Sweep oscillation mode
sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:MODE?
Description
Selects/queries the sweep mode
Setting parameter
SINGle|CONTinuous|GATed
SINGle→ Single
CONTinuous → Continuous
GATed→ Gated single
Query parameter
None
Response format
SING|CONT|GAT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:MODE SINGle
Sets the sweep mode of CH1 to the single

2.3.1.12

Sweep oscillation mode
frequency sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:MODE?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation frequency sweep
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation frequency sweep
Setting parameter
CW|FIXed|SWEep
CW→ Switch to the continuous oscillation when the oscillation mode is thesweep oscillation frequency sweep
FIXed→ Switch to the continuous oscillation when the oscillation mode is thesweep oscillation frequency sweep
SWEep→ Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation frequency
sweep
Query parameter
None
Response format

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

46

CW|FIX|SWE
CW | FIX : The oscillation mode is not the sweep oscillation frequency sweep
SWE: The oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation frequency sweep
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to the frequency sweep

2.3.1.13

Sweep oscillation mode
phase sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:MODE?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation phase sweep
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation phase sweep
Setting parameter
FIXed|SWEep
FIXed
SWEep

→ Switch to the continuous oscillation when the oscillation mode is thesweep oscillation phase sweep→ Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation phase sweep

Query parameter
None
Response format
FIX|SWE
FIX
SWE: The oscillation mode is not the sweep oscillation phase sweep: The oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation phase sweep

Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:MODE SWEep
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to the phase sweep

2.3.1.14

Sweep oscillation mode
amplitude sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:MODE?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation amplitude sweep
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation amplitude sweep
Setting parameter
FIXed|SWEep
FIXed
SWEep

→ Switch to the continuous oscillation when the oscillation mode is thesweep oscillation amplitude sweep→ Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation amplitude
sweep

Query parameter
None
Response format
FIX|SWE
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

47

FIX
SWE

: The oscillation mode is not the sweep oscillation amplitude sweep: The oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation amplitude sweep

Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:MODE
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to the amplitude sweep

2.3.1.15

SWEep

Sweep oscillation mode
DC offset sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MODE?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation DC offset sweep
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation DC offset sweep
Setting parameter
FIXed|SWEep
FIXed
SWEep

→ Switch to the continuous oscillation when the oscillation mode is thesweep oscillation DC offset sweep→ Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation DC offset
sweep

Query parameter
None
Response format
FIX|SWE
FIX
SWE: The oscillation mode is not the sweep oscillation DC offset sweep: The oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation DC offset sweep

Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MODE
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to the DC offset sweep

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

SWEep

48

2.3.1.16

Sweep oscillation mode
duty sweep selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:MODE?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation duty sweep
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation duty sweep
Setting parameter
FIXed|SWEep
FIXed
SWEep

→ Switch to the continuous oscillation when the oscillation mode is thesweep oscillation duty sweep→ Switches the oscillation mode to the sweep oscillation duty sweep

Query parameter
None
Response format
FIX|SWE
FIX
SWE: The oscillation mode is not the sweep oscillation duty sweep: The oscillation mode is the sweep oscillation duty sweep

Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:MODE SWEep
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to the duty sweep

2.3.1.17

Burst oscillation mode selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:STATe?
Description
Switches the oscillation mode between the continuous and burst oscillation modes
Queries whether or not the oscillation mode is burst
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Continuous
1/ON: Burst
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : The oscillation mode is not a burst oscillation mode
1 : The oscillation mode is a burst oscillation mode
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:STATe ON
Sets the oscillation mode of CH1 to burst

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)492.3.2 Output Waveform Selection Command Details
2.3.2.1

Waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Sets/queries the waveform
Setting parameter
DC|NOISe|SINusoid|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|USER
DC→ DC
NOISe → Noise
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
PULSe → Pulse wave
RAMP → Ramp wave
USER
→ Arbitrary wave
Query parameter
None
Response format
DC|NOIS|SIN|SQU|PULS|RAMP|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FUNCtion:SHAPe RAMP
Sets the waveform of CH1 to ramp wave

2.3.2.2

Arbitrary waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:USER?
Description
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:SOURce1:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of CH1 to the data of the memory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)50

2.3.2.3

Waveform polarity selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:POLarity■:OUTPut[1|2]:POLarity□:OUTPut[1|2]:POLarity?
Description
Selects/queries the polarity of waveform
Setting parameter<shape>,<polarity><shape> ::= SINusoid|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
PULSe → Pulse wave
RAMP → Ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
<polarity> ::= NORMal|INVerted
NORMal → Normal
INVerted → Invert
Query parameter<shape> ::= SINusoid|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|USER† For the meaning of each parameter, see the setting parameter
Response format
NORM|INV† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:POLarity SINusoid, NORMal
Sets the polarity of sine wave of CH1 to normal

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)51

2.3.2.4

pAmplitude range selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SCALe■:OUTPut[1|2]:SCALe□:OUTPut[1|2]:SCALe?
Description
Selects/queries the amplitude range of waveform
Setting parameter<shape>,<scale><shape> ::= SINusoid|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
PULSe → Pulse wave
RAMP → Ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
<scale> ::= MFS|FS|PFS
MFS→ -FS/0FS→ ± FS
PFS→ 0/+FS
Query parameter<shape> ::= SINusoid|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|USER† For the meaning of each parameter, see the setting parameter
Response format
MFS|FS|PFS† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SCALe SINusoid, FS
Sets the amplitude range of sine wave of CH1 to ± FS

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)52

2.3.3 Individual Output Waveform Setting Command Details
2.3.3.1

Square/pulse wave shared
duty unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the phase unit
Setting parameter
PCT|USER
PCT
USER

→
→

%
User-defined unit

Query parameter
None
Response format
PCT|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT
Sets the duty of CH1 to %PCTRemarks† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.3.2

Square/pulse wave shared
duty user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:USER?
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of duty
Setting parameter[<name>],[<form>],[<m>],[<n>]<name> ::= <STR><STR> → User-defined unit name (up to 4 characters)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<form> ::= LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→ Linear
LOGarithmic → Log† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<m>::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ m (scale)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

53

<n>

::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ n (offset)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)

Query parameter
None
Response format<name>,<form>,<m>,<n><name> ::= <STR><form> ::= LIN|LOG<m>::= <NR3><n>::= <NR2>† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:USER "INTN",LINear,100,0
Sets the user-defined unit of duty of CH1 to "INTN"

2.3.3.3

Square wave
duty value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle?
Description
Sets/queries the duty of oscillator (square wave)† The setting range of duty varies depending on the oscillator frequency.
Setting parameter<duty>|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Duty (square wave):(Standard range) 0.0100% to 99.9900%,(Extended range) 0.0000% to 100.0000%,Resolution: 0.0001%<units>::= PCT|USERMINimum→ (Standard range) 0.0100%,(Extended range) 0.0000%
MAXimum → (Standard range) 99.9900%,(Extended range) 100.0000%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle 20PCT
Sets the duty of CH1 (square wave) to 20%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)54

Remarks
To enable the duty extended range of square wave, set the square wave extension to on at"[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend" in "2.3.3.4 Square wave extension on/off
selection."

2.3.3.4

Square wave
extension on/off selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend?
Description
Selects/queries on/off of the square wave extension
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Square wave extension off
1/ON: Square wave extension on
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : Square wave extension off
1 : Square wave extension on
Setting example:SOURce1:FUNCtion:SQUare:EXTend ON
Sets the square wave extension of CH1 to on

2.3.3.5

Pulse wave
duty value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle?
Description
Sets/queries the duty (pulse wave)† The setting range of duty varies depending on the oscillator frequency.
Setting parameter<duty>|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Duty (pulse wave):0.0170% to 99.9830%,
Resolution :0.0001%<units>::= PCT|USERMINimum→ 0.0170%
MAXimum → 99.9830%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

55

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle 20PCT
Sets the duty of CH1 (pulse wave) to 20%

2.3.3.6

Pulse wave
pulse width setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:WIDTh■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:WIDTh□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:WIDTh?
Description
Sets/queries the pulse width
Setting parameter<width>|MINimum|MAXimum<width> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Pulse width: 24.00 ns to 99.9830 Ms,
Resolution: 0.001% or less of period or 0.01 ns<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:WIDTh 1ms
Sets the pulse width of CH1 to 1 ms

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)56

2.3.3.7

Pulse wave
rising time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition[:LEADing]?
Description
Sets/queries the pulse wave rising time
Setting parameter<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum<seconds> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Rising time: 15.0 ns to 62.5 Ms,
Resolution: 3 digits or 0.1 ns<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ 15.0 ns
MAXimum → 62.5 Ms
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:TRANsition:LEADing 1ms
Sets the rising time of pulse wave of CH1 to 1 ms

2.3.3.8

Pulse wave
falling time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling?
Description
Sets/queries the pulse wave falling time
Setting parameter<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum<seconds> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Falling time: 15.0 ns to 62.5 Ms,
Resolution: 3 digits or 0.1 ns<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ 15.0 ns
MAXimum → 62.5 Ms
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

57

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:TRANsition:TRAiling 1ms
Sets the falling time of pulse wave of CH1 to 1 ms

2.3.3.9

Pulse wave
period setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod?
Description
Sets/queries the period
Setting parameter<period>|MINimum|MAXimum<period> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Period: 50 ns to 100 Ms† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S|USERMINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:PERiod 1US
Sets the period of CH1 to 1 μs

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

58

2.3.3.10

Pulse wave
period unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the period unit
Setting parameter
S|USER
S
USER

→
→

s
User-defined unit

Query parameter
None
Response format
S|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT
Sets the period unit of CH1 to s

S

Remarks† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.3.11

Pulse wave
period user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:USER?
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of period
Setting parameter[<name>],[<form>],[<m>],[<n>]<name>::= <STR><STR>→ User-defined unit name (up to 4 characters)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<form> ::= LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→ Linear
LOGarithmic → Log† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<m>::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ m (scale)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

59

<n>

::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ n (offset)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)

Query parameter
None
Response format<name>,<form>,<m>,<n><name>::= <STR><form> ::= LIN|LOG<m>::= <NR3><n> ::= <NR2>† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:PERiod:USER "ms",LINear,1000,0
Sets the user-defined unit of period of CH1 to "ms"2.3.3.12

Ramp wave
symmetry setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry?
Description
Sets/queries the symmetry of ramp wave
Setting parameter<symmetry>|MINimum|MAXimum<symmetry> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Symmetry: 0.00% to 100.00%, Resolution: 0.01%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ 0.00%
MAXimum → 100.00%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry 20PCT
Sets the symmetry of ramp wave of CH1 to 20%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)60

2.3.4 Output Signal Setting Command Details
2.3.4.1

Frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]?
Description
Sets/queries the frequency of oscillator
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Frequency: 0.01 Hz to 30 MHz, Resolution: 0.01 μHz† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ|USERMINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 1MHZ
Sets the frequency of CH1 to 1 MHz

2.3.4.2

Frequency unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the frequency unit
Setting parameter
HZ|USER
HZ
USER

→
→

Hz
User-defined unit

Query parameter:
None
Response format
HZ|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:UNIT HZ
Sets the frequency unit of CH1 to Hz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)61

Remarks† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.4.3

Frequency user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:USER?
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of frequency
Setting parameter[<name>],[<form>],[<m>],[<n>]<name>::= <STR><STR>→ User-defined unit name (up to 4 characters)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<form> ::= LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→ Linear
LOGarithmic → Log† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<m>::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ m (scale)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<n> ::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ n (offset)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)
Query parameter
None
Response format<name>,<form>,<m>,<n><name>::= <STR><form> ::= LIN|LOG<m>::= <NR3><n> ::= <NR2>† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:USER "kHz",LINear,0.001,0
Sets the user-defined unit of frequency of CH1 to "kHz"WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

622.3.4.4

Amplitude setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?
Description
Sets/queries the amplitude of oscillator
Setting parameter<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum<amplitude> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Amplitude: 0 Vp-p to 20 Vp-p/open,
0 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p/50Ω,Resolution: (999.9 mVp-p or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mVp-p,(1 Vp-p or more) 5 digits or 1 mVp-p<eunits> ::= M<units>::= VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM|USERMINimum→ 0 Vp-p
MAXimum → 20 Vp-p/open, 10 Vp-p/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude
Sets the amplitude of CH1 to 10 Vp-p

2.3.4.5

10VPP

Amplitude unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the amplitude unit
Setting parameter
VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM|USER
VPP→ Vp-p
VPK→ Vpk
VRMS → Vrms
DBV
→ dBV
DBM
→ dBm
USER
→ User-defined unit

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)63

Query parameter
None
Response format
VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:UNIT
Sets the amplitude unit of CH1 to Vp-p

VPP

Remarks† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.4.6

Amplitude user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:USER?
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of amplitude
Setting parameter[<name>],[<form>],[<m>],[<n>]<name>::= <STR><STR>→ User-defined unit name (up to 4 characters)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<form> ::= LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→ Linear
LOGarithmic → Log† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<m>::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ m (scale)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<n> ::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ n (offset)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)
Query parameter
None
Response format<name>,<form>,<m>,<n><name> ::= <STR><form> ::= LIN|LOG<m>::= <NR3><n>::= <NR2>† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:USER
Sets the user-defined unit of amplitude of CH1 to "mVpk"

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)"mVpk",LINear,1000,0642.3.4.7

DC offset setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet?
Description
Sets/queries the DC offset of oscillator
Setting parameter<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum<offset> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → DC offset: ± 10 V/open, ± 5 V/50Ω,Resolution: (± 499.9 mV or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mV,(± 0.5 V or more) 5 digits or 1 mV<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V|USERMINimum→ -10 V/open, -5 V/50Ω
MAXimum → 10 V/open, 5 V/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet
Sets the DC offset of CH1 to 2.5 V

2.3.4.8

2.5V

DC offset unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT
Description
Selects/queries the DC offset unit
Setting parameter
V|USER
V
USER

→
→

V
User-defined unit

Query parameter
None
Response format
V|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet:UNIT
Sets the DC offset of CH1 to V

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)V

65

Remarks† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.4.9

DC offset user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:USER?
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of DC offset
Setting parameter[<name>],[<form>],[<m>],[<n>]<name>::= <STR><STR> → User-defined unit name (up to 4 characters)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<form> ::= LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→ Linear
LOGarithmic→ Log† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<m>::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ m (scale)
MINimum→ Minimum value
MAXimum→ Maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<n> ::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ n (offset)
MINimum→ Minimum value
MAXimum→ Maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)
Query parameter
None
Response format<name>,<form>,<m>,<n><name>::= <STR><form> ::= LIN|LOG<m>::= <NR3><n> ::= <NR2>† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet:USER
Sets the user-defined unit of DC offset of CH1 to "mV"WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)"mV",LINear,1000,066

2.3.4.10

Phase setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe[:ADJust]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe[:ADJust]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe[:ADJust]?
Description
Sets/queries the phase of oscillator
Setting parameter<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum<phase> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Phase: -1800.000° to 1800.000°,Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEG|USERMINimum→ -1800.000°
MAXimum → 1800.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:ADJust 90DEG
Sets the phase of CH1 to 90°

2.3.4.11

Phase unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the phase unit
Setting parameter
DEG|USER
DEG
USER

→
→

°
User-defined unit

Query parameter
None
Response format
DEG|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:UNIT DEG
Sets the unit of phase of CH1 to °Remarks† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)672.3.4.12

Phase user-defined unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:USER?
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of phase
Setting parameter[<name>],[<form>],[<m>],[<n>]<name>::= <STR><STR> → User-defined unit name (up to 4 characters)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<form> ::= LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→ Linear
LOGarithmic→ Log† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<m>::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ m (scale)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)<n> ::= <REAL>|MINimum|MAXimum<REAL>→ n (offset)
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum→ Sets the maximum value† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)
Query parameter
None
Response format<name>,<form>,<m>,<n><name>::= <STR><form> ::= LIN|LOG<m>::= <NR3><n> ::= <NR2>† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:USER "rad",LINear,0.01745,0
Sets the user-defined unit of phase of CH1 to "rad"WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)682.3.4.13

Output voltage range high level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH?
Description
Sets/queries the high level
Setting parameter<high>|MINimum|MAXimum<high> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → High level† The setting range varies depending on the state.
<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V|USERMINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:HIGH
Sets the high level of CH1 to 5 V

2.3.4.14

5Output voltage range high level unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the high level unit
Setting parameter
V|USER
V
USER

→
→

V
User-defined unit

Query parameter
None
Response format
V|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:HIGH:UNIT
Sets the unit of high level of CH1 to V

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)V

69

Remarks† The user-defined unit is the same as that of DC offset.
† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.4.15

Output voltage range low level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW?
Description
Sets/queries the low level
Setting parameter<low>|MINimum|MAXimum<low> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Low level† The setting range varies depending on the state.
<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V|USERMINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Sets the minimum value
Sets the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:LOW
Sets the low level of CH1 to 0 V

2.3.4.160Output voltage range low level unit selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT?
Description
Selects/queries the low level unit
Setting parameter
V|USER
V
USER

→
→

V
User-defined unit

Query parameter
None
Response format
V|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)70

Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:LOW:UNIT
Sets the unit of low level of CH1 to V

V

Remarks† The user-defined unit is the same as that of DC offset.
† This command is system unit setting command, it is not reflected on this device screen.
† For system unit, see the Chapter 2.5.

2.3.5 Signal Output Operation Command Details
2.3.5.1

Output on/off setting/query:OUTPut[1|2][:STATe]■:OUTPut[1|2][:STATe]□:OUTPut[1|2][:STATe]?
Description
Selects/queries the output on/off
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Output Off
1/ON: Output On
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : Output Off
1 : Output On
Setting example:OUTPut1:STATe ON
Sets the output of CH1 to on

2.3.5.2

Output-on at power-on setting/query:OUTPut[1|2]:PON■:OUTPut[1|2]:PON□:OUTPut[1|2]:PON?
Description
Selects/queries the output on/off of power-on operation
Setting parameter
ON|OFF|LAST
ON
OFF
LAST

→
→
→

Output on
Output off
Setting of previous output off operation

Query parameter
None
Response format
ON|OFF|LAST† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)71

Setting example:OUTPut1:PON ON
Sets the output of power-on operation of CH1 to on

2.3.5.3

Auto-range operation (output range) selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?
Description
Selects/queries the automatic range on/off
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Automatic range off
1/ON: Automatic range on
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : Automatic range off
1 : Automatic range on
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO ON
Sets the automatic range of CH1 to on

2.3.5.4

Phase synchronization setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:INITiate■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:INITiate
Description
Executes the phase synchronization
Setting parameter
None

2.3.5.5

External addition input setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:COMBine:FEED■[:SOURce[1|2]]:COMBine:FEED□[:SOURce[1|2]]:COMBine:FEED?
Description
Selects/queries the external addition
Setting parameter
OFF|X0.4|X2|X10
OFF→ Disables the external addition
X0.4→ Adds 0.4 times of external input to the output
X2→ Adds 2 times of external input to the output
X10→ Adds 10 times of external input to the output
Query parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)72

Response format
OFF|X0.4|X2|X10† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:COMBine:FEED X2
Adds 2 times of external input to the output of CH1

2.3.5.6

Load impedance setting/query:OUTPut[1|2]:LOAD■:OUTPut[1|2]:LOAD□:OUTPut[1|2]:LOAD?
Description
Sets/queries the load impedance
Setting parameter<load>|MINimum|MAXimum|INFinity<load> ::= <INT>[<eunits>][<units>]<INT>→ Load impedance: 1 Ω to 10 kΩ, Resolution: 1 Ω<eunits> ::= K<units>::= OHMMINimum→ 1Ω
MAXimum → 10 kΩ
INFinity→ High-Z
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<INT>|INF
Setting example:OUTPut1:LOAD 50OHM
Sets the load impedance of CH1 to 50 Ω

2.3.6 Trigger Operation Command Details
2.3.6.1

Trigger operation
Manual trigger (TRIG key operation)
*TRG
■*TRG
Description
This is the same behavior as the trigger execution when pressing the [TRIG] button
Setting parameter
None
Remarks† Channels cannot be specified. The trigger for CH1 is assumed.
† It may not be used depending on the oscillation mode (see Table 2.3).

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)732.3.6.2

Trigger operation sweep mode
trigger source selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SOURce■:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SOURce□:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the sweep trigger source
Setting parameter
TIMer|EXTernal|CH1
TIMer→
EXTernal→
CH1→

Trigger with the internal trigger period
External trigger
External trigger of CH1 (Only CH2 can be selected)

Query parameter
None
Response format
TIM|EXT|CH1† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:TRIGger2:SWEep:SOURce EXT
Sets the sweep trigger source of CH2 to external

2.3.6.3

Trigger operation sweep modeinternal trigger cycle setting/query:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:TIMer■:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:TIMer□:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:TIMer?
Description
Sets/queries the internal sweep trigger period
Setting parameter<period>|MINimum|MAXimum<period> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Period: 100.0 μs to 10,000 s, Resolution :5 digits or 0.1 μs<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ 100.0 μs
MAXimum → 10,000 s
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:TRIGger1:SWEep:TIMer 1MS
Sets the internal sweep trigger period of CH1 to 1 ms

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

742.3.6.4

Trigger operation sweep mode
external trigger signal polarity selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SLOPe■:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SLOPe□:TRIGger[1|2]:SWEep:SLOPe?
Description
Selects/queries the external sweep trigger polarity
Setting parameter
POSitive|NEGative|OFF
POSitive→
NEGative→
OFF→

Rising
Falling
Disabled

Query parameter
None
Response format
POS|NEG|OFF† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:TRIGger:SWEep:SLOPe NEGative
Sets the external sweep trigger polarity to falling

2.3.6.5

Trigger operation burst mode
trigger source selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SOURce■ :TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SOURce□:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the burst trigger source
Setting parameter
TIMer|EXTernal|CH1
TIMer→
EXTernal→
CH1→

Trigger with the internal trigger period
External trigger
External trigger of CH1 (Only CH2 can be selected)

Query parameter
None
Response format
TIM|EXT|CH1† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:TRIGger2:BURSt:SOURce EXT
Sets the burst trigger source of CH2 to external

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)75

2.3.6.6

Trigger operation burst modeinternal trigger cycle setting/query:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:TIMer■:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:TIMer□:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:TIMer?
Description
Sets/queries the internal burst trigger period
Setting parameter<period>|MINimum|MAXimum<period> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Period: 1.0 μs to 1,000 s, Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 μs<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ 1.0 μs
MAXimum → 1,000 s
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:TRIGger1:BURSt:TIMer 1MS
Sets the internal burst trigger period of CH1 to 1 ms

2.3.6.7

Trigger operation burst mode
external trigger signal polarity selection/query:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SLOPe■:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SLOPe□:TRIGger[1|2]:BURSt:SLOPe?
Description
Selects/queries the external burst trigger polarity
Setting parameter
POSitive|NEGative|OFF
POSitive→
NEGative→
OFF→

Rising
Falling
Disabled

Query parameter
None
Response format
POS|NEG|OFF† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:TRIGger:BURSt:SLOPe NEGative
Sets the external burst trigger polarity to falling

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)762.3.6.8

Trigger operation
execution control setting:TRIGger[1|2]:SELected:EXECute■:TRIGger[1|2]:SELected:EXECute
Description
Controls each oscillation mode
Setting parameter
Modulated oscillation mode
STARt|STOP
STARt → Start
STOP→ Stop
Sweep oscillation mode
STARt|STOP|HOLD|RESumeSTARt → Start
STOP→ StopHOLD → Hold
RESume → Resume
Remarks† This command cannot be used for the burst oscillation mode.

2.3.7 Modulated Oscillation Mode Command Details
2.3.7.1

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation degree setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM[:DEPTh]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM[:DEPTh]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM[:DEPTh]?
Description
Sets/queries the AM modulation depth
Setting parameter<depth>|MINimum|MAXimum<depth> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Modulation depth: 0.0% to 100.0%, Resolution: 0.1%
<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ 0.0%
MAXimum → 100.0%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:AM:DEPTh 30PCT
Sets the AM modulation depth of CH1 to 30%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

772.3.7.2

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the AM modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal
External

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:AM:SOURce INTernal
Sets the AM modulation source of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.3

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the AM internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 1 MHz,
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 1 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:AM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the AM internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

782.3.7.4

Modulated oscillation mode AM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Selects/queries the AM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter
SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|PRAMp|NRAMp|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
TRIangle → Triangle wave
PRAMp → Rising ramp wave
NRAMp → Falling ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
Query parameter
None
Response format
SIN|SQU|TRI|PRAM|NRAM|NOIS|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid
Sets the AM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to sine wave

2.3.7.5

Modulated oscillation mode AM
arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER?
Description
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform of AM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:SOURce1:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of AM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to the data of thememory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

792.3.7.6

Modulated oscillation mode AM
synchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AM:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AM:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AM:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the AM synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc|MFCTn
SYNC→ Waveform synchronization
MSYNc → Internal modulation synchronization
MFCTn → Internal modulation signal
Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN|MFCT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:AM:TYPE SYNC
Sets the AM synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.7

Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
modulation degree setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC[:DEPTh]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC[:DEPTh]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC[:DEPTh]?
Description
Sets/queries the AM (DSB-SC) modulation depth
Setting parameter<depth>|MINimum|MAXimum<depth> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Modulation depth :0.0% to 100.0%, Resolution :0.1%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ 0.0%
MAXimum → 100.0%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:AMSC:DEPTh 30PCT
Sets the AM (DSB-SC) modulation depth of CH1 to 30%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)802.3.7.8

Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the AM (DSB-SC) modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal modulation source
External modulation source

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:AMSC:SOURce INTernal
Sets the AM (DSB-SC) modulation source of CH1 to internal modulation source

2.3.7.9

Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the AM (DSB-SC) internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 1 MHz,
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 1 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:AMSC:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the AM (DSB-SC) internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

81

2.3.7.10

Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Selects/queries the AM (DSB-SC) internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter
SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|PRAMp|NRAMp|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
TRIangle → Triangle wave
PRAMp → Rising ramp wave
NRAMp → Falling ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
Query parameter
None
Response format
SIN|SQU|TRI|PRAM|NRAM|NOIS|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid
Sets the AM (DSB-SC) internal modulation waveform of CH1 to sine wave

2.3.7.11

Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER?
Description
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform of AM (DSB-SC) internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:SOURce1:AMSC:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of AM (DSB-SC) internal modulation waveform of CH1 to thedata of the memory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)82

2.3.7.12

Modulated oscillation mode AM (DSB-SC)
synchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the AM (DSB-SC) synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc|MFCTn
SYNC→ Waveform synchronization
MSYNc → Internal modulation synchronization
MFCTn → Internal modulation signal
Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN|MFCT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE SYNC
Sets the AM (DSB-SC) synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.13

Modulated oscillation mode FM
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM[:DEViation]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM[:DEViation]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM[:DEViation]?
Description
Sets/queries the FM peak deviation
Setting parameter<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum<deviation> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Peak deviation: 0.00 μHz to less than 15 MHz,
Resolution: 8 digits or 0.01 μHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:DEViation 1KHZ
Sets the FM peak deviation of CH1 to 1 kHz
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)832.3.7.14

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the FM modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal
External

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:SOURce INTernal
Sets the FM modulation source of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.15

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the FM internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 1 MHz,
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 1 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the FM internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)842.3.7.16

Modulated oscillation mode FM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Selects/queries the FM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter
SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|PRAMp|NRAMp|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
TRIangle → Triangle wave
PRAMp → Rising ramp wave
NRAMp → Falling ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
Query parameter
None
Response format
SIN|SQU|TRI|PRAM|NRAM|NOIS|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid
Sets the FM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to sine wave

2.3.7.17

Modulated oscillation mode FM
arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER?
Description
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform of FM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of FM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to the data of thememory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)85

2.3.7.18

Modulated oscillation mode FM
synchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FM:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FM:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FM:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the FM synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc|MFCTn
SYNC→ Waveform synchronization
MSYNc → Internal modulation synchronization
MFCTn → Internal modulation signal
Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN|MFCT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:FM:TYPE SYNC
Sets the FM synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.19

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
hop frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey[:FREQuency]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey[:FREQuency]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey[:FREQuency]?
Description
Selects/queries the FSK hop frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Hop frequency† The setting range is within the allowed frequency setting
range for each carrier waveform.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FSKey:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the FSK hop frequency of CH1 to 1 KHZ
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)862.3.7.20

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the FSK modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal|CH1
INTernal→
EXTernal→
CH1→

Internal
External
External of CH1 (Only CH2 can be selected)

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT|CH1† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FSKey:SOURce INTernal
Sets the FSK modulation source of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.21

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the FSK internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 3 MHz
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 3 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FSKey:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the FSK internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)87

2.3.7.22

Modulated oscillation mode FSK
synchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FSKey:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FSKey:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:FSKey:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the FSK synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc
SYNC→
MSYNc →

Waveform synchronization
Internal modulation synchronization

Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:FSKey:TYPE
SYNC
Sets the FSK synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.23

Modulated oscillation mode PM
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM[:DEViation]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM[:DEViation]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM[:DEViation]?
Description
Sets/queries the PM peak deviation
Setting parameter<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum<deviation> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Peak deviation: 0.000° to 180.000°, Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEGMINimum→ 0.000°
MAXimum → 180.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PM:DEViation 30DEG
Sets the PM peak deviation of CH1 to 30°

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)88

2.3.7.24

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the PM modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal
External

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PM:SOURce INTernal
Sets the PM modulation source of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.25

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the PM internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 1 MHz
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 1 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the PM internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

892.3.7.26

Modulated oscillation mode PM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Selects/queries the PM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter
SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|PRAMp|NRAMp|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
TRIangle → Triangle wave
PRAMp → Rising ramp wave
NRAMp → Falling ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
Query parameter
None
Response format
SIN|SQU|TRI|PRAM|NRAM|NOIS|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid
Sets the PM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to sine wave

2.3.7.27

Modulated oscillation mode PM
arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER?
Description
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform of PM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:SOURce1:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of PM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to the data of thememory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)902.3.7.28

Modulated oscillation mode PMsynchronization output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PM:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PM:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PM:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the PM synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc|MFCTn
SYNC→ Waveform synchronization
MSYNc → Internal modulation synchronization
MFCTn → Internal modulation signal
Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN|MFCT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:PM:TYPE SYNC
Sets the PM synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.29

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey[:DEViation]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey[:DEViation]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey[:DEViation]?
Description
Sets/queries the PSK deviation
Setting parameter<deviation>|MINimun|MAXimum<deviation> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Deviation: -1800.000° to 1800.000°, Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEGMINimum→ -1800.000°
MAXimum → 1800.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PSKey:DEViation 30DEG
Sets the PSK deviation of CH1 to 30°

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

912.3.7.30

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the PSK modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal|CH1
INTernal→
EXTernal→
CH1→

Internal
External
External of CH1 (Only CH2 can be selected)

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT|CH1† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PSKey:SOURce INTernal
Sets the PSK modulation source of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.31

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the PSK internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 3 MHz,
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 3 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PSKey:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the PSK internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

922.3.7.32

Modulated oscillation mode PSK
synchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PSKey:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PSKey:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PSKey:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the PSK synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc
SYNC→
MSYNc →

Waveform synchronization
Internal modulation synchronization

Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:PSKey:TYPE SYNC
Sets the PSK synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.33

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle?
Description
Sets/queries the PWM peak deviation
Setting parameter<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum<deviation> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → (Square wave (duty variable range standard))
Peak deviation: 0.0000% to 49.9900%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend))
Peak deviation: 0.0000% to 50.0000%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Pulse wave)
Peak deviation :0.0000% to 49.9000%, Resolution: 0.0001%<units> ::= PCT
MINimum→ 0.0000%
MAXimum → (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 49.9900%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 50.0000%,(Pulse wave) 49.9000%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

93Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PWM:DEViation:DCYCle 30PCT
Sets the PWM peak deviation of CH1 to 30%

2.3.7.34

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the PWM modulation source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal
External

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PWM:SOURce INTernal
Sets the PWM modulation source of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.35

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the PWM internal modulation frequency
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 1 MHz
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 1 MHz
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

94Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz
Sets the PWM internal modulation frequency of CH1 to 1 kHz

2.3.7.36

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Selects/queries the PWM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter
SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|PRAMp|NRAMp|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
TRIangle → Triangle wave
PRAMp → Rising ramp wave
NRAMp → Falling ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
Query parameter
None
Response format
SIN|SQU|TRI|PRAM|NRAM|NOIS|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid
Sets the PWM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to sine wave

2.3.7.37

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER?
Description:
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform of PWM internal modulation waveform
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)95

Setting example:SOURce1:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of PWM internal modulation waveform of CH1 to the data of thememory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

2.3.7.38

Modulated oscillation mode PWM
synchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PWM:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PWM:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:PWM:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the PWM synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc|MFCTn
SYNC→ Waveform synchronization
MSYNc → Internal modulation synchronization
MFCTn → Internal modulation signal
Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN|MFCT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:PWM:TYPE SYNC
Sets the PWM synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

2.3.7.39

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
peak deviation setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM[:DEViation]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM[:DEViation]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM[:DEViation]?
Description
Sets/queries the peak deviation of DC offset modulation
Setting parameter<deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum<deviation> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Peak deviation: 0 V to 10 V/open,
Resolution: (499.9 mV or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mV,(0.5 V or more) 5 digits or 1 mV<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V
MINimum→ 0 V/open
MAXimum → 10 V/open

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)96

Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:OFSM:DEViation 3V
Sets the peak deviation of DC offset modulation of CH1 to 3 V

2.3.7.40

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
modulation source selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:SOURce?
Description
Selects/queries the modulation source of DC offset modulation
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal
External

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:OFSM:SOURce INTernal
Sets the modulation source of DC offset modulation of CH1 to internal

2.3.7.41

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
modulation frequency setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the internal modulation frequency of DC offset modulation
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Internal modulation frequency: 0.1 mHz to 100 kHz,
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 mHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ 0.1 mHz
MAXimum → 100 kHz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)97

Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:OFSM:INTernal:FREQuency 1KHZ
Sets the internal modulation frequency of DC offset modulation of CH1 to 1 kHz

2.3.7.42

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]?
Description
Selects/queries the internal modulation waveform of DC offset modulation
Setting parameter
SINusoid|SQUare|TRIangle|PRAMp|NRAMp|NOISe|USER
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
TRIangle → Triangle wave
PRAMp → Rising ramp wave
NRAMp → Falling ramp wave
NOISe → Noise
USER→ Arbitrary wave
Response format
SIN|SQU|TRI|PRAM|NRAM|NOIS|USER† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid
Sets the internal modulation waveform of DC offset modulation of CH1 to sine wave

2.3.7.43

Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulation
arbitrary waveform of modulation waveform selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER?
Description
Selects/queries the arbitrary waveform of internal modulation waveform of DC offset
modulation
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Query parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)98

Response format<NR1>
Setting example:SOURce1:OFSM:INTernal:FUNCtion:USER 3
Sets the arbitrary waveform of internal modulation waveform of DC offset modulation of CH1
to the data of the memory number 3
Remarks† Memory number 0 is the edit memory.

2.3.7.44 Modulated oscillation mode DC offset modulationsynchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:OFSM:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:OFSM:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:OFSM:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the synchronization output of DC offset modulation
Setting parameter
SYNC|MSYNc|MFCTn
SYNC→ Waveform synchronization
MSYNc → Internal modulation synchronization
MFCTn → Internal modulation signal
Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|MSYN|MFCT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:OFSM:TYPE SYNC
Sets the DC offset modulation synchronization output of CH1 to waveform synchronization

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

992.3.8 Sweep Oscillation Mode Command Details
2.3.8.1

Basic sweep setting
sweep slope selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SPACing■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SPACing□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SPACing?
Description
Selects/queries the sweep slope
Setting parameter
LINear|LOGarithmic
LINear→
LOGarithmic →LinearLogarithm

Query parameter
None
Response format
LIN|LOG† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:SPACing LINear
Sets the slope of CH1 to linear

2.3.8.2

Basic sweep setting
sweep direction selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Description
Selects/queries the sweep direction
Setting parameter
RAMP|TRIangle
RAMP →
TRIangle →One way
ShuttleQuery parameter
None
Response format
RAMP|TRI† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion RAMP
Sets the sweep direction of CH1 to one way

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1002.3.8.3

Basic sweep setting
sweep time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:TIME■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:TIME□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:TIME?
Description
Sets/queries the sweep time
Setting parameter<time>|MINimum|MAXimum<time> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Sweep time: 0.1 ms to 10,000 s
Resolution: 4 digits or 0.1 ms<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ 0.1 ms
MAXimum → 10,000 s
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:TIME 1MS
Sets the sweep time of CH1 to 1 ms

2.3.8.4

Basic sweep setting
stop level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel?
Description
Sets/queries the stop level value of oscillation stop of gated single-shot sweep
Setting parameter<level>|MAXimum|MINimum<level> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Stop level value: -100.00% to 100.00%,
Resolution: 0.01%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ -100.00%
MAXimum → 100.00%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value101

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:SLEVel 20PCT
Set the stop level value of oscillation stop of gated single-shot sweep of CH1 to 20%

2.3.8.5

Basic sweep setting
stop level selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe?
Description
Selects/queries the stop level of oscillation stop of single-shot sweep and gated single-shot
sweep
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Disable
1/ON: Enable
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0: Disable
1: Enable
Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe ON
Sets the stop level of oscillation stop of single-shot sweep and gated single-shot sweep of CH1
to enable

2.3.8.6

Basic sweep setting
oscillation stop unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:OSTop■[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:OSTop□[:SOURce[1|2]]:SWEep:OSTop?
Description
Selects/queries the oscillation stop unit of sweep oscillation
Setting parameter
HALF|CYCLe
HALF
CYCLe

→
→

Half cycle
1 cycleQuery parameter
None
Response format
HALF|CYCL† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

102

Setting example:SOURce1:SWEep:OSTop HALF
Sets the oscillation stop unit of sweep oscillation of CH1 to half cycle

2.3.8.7

Frequency sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STARt■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STARt□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STARt?
Description
Sets/queries the start value of frequency sweep
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Start value: 0.01 μHz to 30 MHz,
Resolution: 0.01 μHz† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:STARt 1KHZ
Sets the start value of frequency sweep of CH1 to 1 kHz

2.3.8.8

Frequency sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STOP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STOP□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STOP?
Description
Sets/queries the stop value of frequency sweep
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Stop value: 0.01 μHz to 30 MHz,
Resolution: 0.01 μHz† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZWF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)103

MINimum
MAXimum→→

Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Sets the minimum value
Sets the maximum value

Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:STOP 1KHZ
Sets the stop value of frequency sweep of CH1 to 1 kHz

2.3.8.9

Frequency sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:CENTer■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:CENTer□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:CENTer?
Description
Sets/queries the center value of frequency sweep
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Center value: 0.01 μHz to 30 MHz
Resolution: 0.01 μHz† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:CENTer 1KHZ
Sets the center value of frequency sweep of CH1 to 1 kHz

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1042.3.8.10

Frequency sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SPAN■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SPAN□[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SPAN?
Description
Sets/queries the span value of frequency sweep
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Span value: 0.00000000 Hz to 29999999.99999999 Hz,
Resolution: 0.01 μHz† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:SPAN 1KHZ
Sets the span value of frequency sweep of CH1 to 1 kHz

2.3.8.11

Frequency sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:FREQuency■[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:FREQuency□[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:FREQuency?
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of frequency sweep
Setting parameter<frequency>|CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Marker value: 0.01 μHz to 30 MHz,
Resolution: 0.01 μHz† The setting range varies depending on the waveform oroscillation mode.
<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
CENTer→ Center value of frequency sweep
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)105

Query parameter[CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum]
CENTer→ Queries the center value of frequency sweep
MINimum→ Queries the minimum value
MAXimum → Queries the maximum value
Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:MARKer:FREQuency 1KHZ
Sets the marker value of frequency sweep of CH1 to 1 kHz

2.3.8.12

Frequency sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SWAP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:SWAP
Description
Swaps the start value with stop value of the frequency sweep
Setting parameter
None
Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:SWAP
Swaps the start value with stop value of the frequency sweep of CH1

2.3.8.13

Frequency sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:STATe
Description
Switches the state of frequency sweep
Setting parameter
STARt|STOP
STARt
STOP

→
→

Switches the output to the start value
Switches the output to the stop value

Setting example:SOURce1:FREQuency:STATe STARt
Switches the state of frequency sweep of CH1 to the start value

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1062.3.8.14

Phase sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STARt■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STARt□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STARt?
Description
Sets/queries the start value of phase sweep
Setting parameter<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum<phase> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Start value: -1800.000° to 1800.000°,Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEGMINimum→ -1800.000°
MAXimum → 1800.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:STARt 90DEG
Sets the start value of phase sweep of CH1 to 90°

2.3.8.15

Phase sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STOP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STOP□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STOP?
Description
Sets/queries the stop value of phase sweep
Setting parameter<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum<phase> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Stop value: -1800.000° to 1800.000°,Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEGMINimum→ -1800.000°
MAXimum → 1800.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

107

:SOURce1:PHASe:STOP 90DEG
Sets the stop value of phase sweep of CH1 to 90°

2.3.8.16

Phase sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:CENTer■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:CENTer□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:CENTer?
Description
Sets/queries the center value of phase sweep
Setting parameter<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum<phase> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Center value: -1800.000° to 1800.000°,Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEGMINimum→ -1800.000°
MAXimum → 1800.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:CENTer 90DEG
Sets the center value of phase sweep of CH1 to 90°

2.3.8.17

Phase sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SPAN■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SPAN□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SPAN?
Description
Sets/queries the span value of phase sweep
Setting parameter<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum<phase> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Span value: 0.000° to 3600.000°,Resolution: 0.001°<units::= DEGMINimum→ 0.000°
MAXimum → 3600.000°
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)108

<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:SPAN 90DEG
Sets the span value of phase sweep of CH1 to 90°

2.3.8.18

Phase sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PHASe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PHASe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PHASe?
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of phase sweep
Setting parameter<phase>|CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum<phase> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Marker value: -1800.000° to 1800.000°,Resolution: 0.001°<units>::= DEGCENTer→ Center value of phase sweep
MINimum→ -1800.000°
MAXimum → 1800.000°
Query parameter[CNETer|MINimum|MAXimum]
CENTer→ Queries the center value of phase sweep
MINimum→ Queries the minimum value
MAXimum → Queries the maximum value
Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:MARKer:PHASe 90DEG
Sets the marker value of phase sweep of CH1 to 90°

2.3.8.19

Phase sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SWAP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:SWAP
Description
Swaps the start value with stop value of the phase sweep
Setting parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1092.3.8.20

Phase sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:STATe
Description
Switches the state of phase sweep
Setting parameter
STARt|STOP
STARt
STOP

→
→

Switches the output to the start value
Switches the output to the stop value

Setting example:SOURce1:PHASe:STATe STARt
Switches the state of phase sweep of CH1 to the start value

2.3.8.21

Amplitude sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STARt■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STARt□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STARt?
Description
Sets/queries the start value of amplitude sweep
Setting parameter<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum<amplitude> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Start value: 0 Vp-p to 20 Vp-p/open,
0 Vp-p to 10Vp-p/50Ω,Resolution: (999.9 mVp-p or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mVp-p,(1 Vp-p or more) 5 digits or 1 mVp-p<eunits> ::= M<units>::= VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM
MINimum→ 0 Vp-p
MAXimum → 20 Vp-p/open, 10 Vp-p/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:STARt
Sets the start value of amplitude sweep of CH1 to 5 Vp-p

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

5VPP

110

2.3.8.22

Amplitude sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STOP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STOP□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STOP?
Description
Sets/queries the stop value of amplitude sweep
Setting parameter<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum<amplitude> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Stop value:
0 Vp-p to 20 Vp-p/open,
0 Vp-p to 10Vp-p/50Ω,Resolution: (999.9 mVp-p or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mVp-p,(1 Vp-p or more) 5 digits or 1 mVp-p<eunits> ::= M<units>::= VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM
MINimum→ 0 Vp-p
MAXimum → 20 Vp-p/open, 10 Vp-p/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:STOP
Sets the stop value of amplitude sweep of CH1 to 5 Vp-p

2.3.8.23

5VPP

Amplitude sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:CENTer■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:CENTer□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:CENTer?
Description
Sets/queries the center value of amplitude sweep
Setting parameter<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum<amplitude> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Center value: 0 Vp-p to 20 Vp-p/open,
0 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p/50Ω,Resolution: (999.9 mVp-p or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mVp-p,(1 Vp-p or more) 5 digits or 1 mVp-p<eunits> ::= M<units>::= VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM
MINimum→ 0 Vp-p
MAXimum → 20 Vp-p/open, 10 Vp-p/50Ω

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)111

Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:CENTer
Sets the center value of amplitude sweep of CH1 to 5 Vp-p

2.3.8.24

5VPP

Amplitude sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SPAN■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SPAN□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SPAN?
Description
Sets/queries the span value of amplitude sweep
Setting parameter<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum<amplitude> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Span value: 0 Vp-p to 20 Vp-p/open,
0 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p/50Ω
† Resolution depends on the start value and stop value.
<eunits> ::= M<units>::= VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM
MINimum→ 0 Vp-p
MAXimum → 20 Vp-p/open, 10Vp-p/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:SPAN
Sets the span value of amplitude sweep of CH1 to 5 Vp-p

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

5VPP

112

2.3.8.25

Amplitude sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of amplitude sweep
Setting parameter<amplitude>|CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum<amplitude> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Marker value: 0 Vp-p to 20 Vp-p/open,
0 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p/50Ω,Resolution: (999.9 mVp-p or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mVp-p,(1 Vp-p or more) 5 digits or 1 mVp-p<eunits> ::= M<units>::= VPP|VPK|VRMS|DBV|DBM
CENTer→ Center value of amplitude sweep
MINimum→ 0 Vp-p
MAXimum → 20 Vp-p/open, 10 Vp-p/50Ω
Query parameter[CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum]
CENTer→ Queries the center value of amplitude sweep
MINimum→ Queries the minimum value
MAXimum → Queries the maximum value
Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:MARKer:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude
Sets the marker value of amplitude sweep of CH1 to 5 Vp-p

2.3.8.26

5VPP

Amplitude sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SWAP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SWAP
Description
Swaps the start value with stop value of the amplitude sweep
Setting parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1132.3.8.27

Amplitude sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STATe
Description
Switches the state of amplitude sweep
Setting parameter
STARt|STOP
STARt
STOP

→
→

Switches the output to the start value
Switches the output to the stop value

Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude:STATe STARt
Switches the state of amplitude sweep of CH1 to the start value

2.3.8.28

DC offset sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt?
Description
Sets/queries the DC offset start value
Setting parameter<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum<offset> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Start value: ± 10 V/open, ± 5 V/50Ω,Resolution: (± 499.9 mV or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mV,(± 0.5 V or more) 5 digits or 1 mV<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V
MINimum→ -10 V/open, -5 V/50Ω
MAXimum → 10 V/open, 5 V/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt
Sets the start value of DC offset of CH1 to 2.5 V

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2.5V

114

2.3.8.29

DC offset sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP?
Description
Sets/queries the stop value of DC offset
Setting parameter<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum<offset> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Stop value: ± 10 V/open, ± 5 V/50Ω,Resolution: (± 499.9 mV or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mV,(± 0.5 V or more) 5 digits or 1 mV<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V
MINimum→ -10 V/open, -5 V/50Ω
MAXimum → 10 V/open, 5 V/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP
Sets the stop value of DC offset of CH1 to 2.5 V

2.3.8.30

2.5V

DC offset sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer?
Description
Sets/queries the center value of DC offset
Setting parameter<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum<offset> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → DC offset: ± 10 V/open, ± 5 V/50Ω,Resolution: (± 499.9 mV or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mV,(± 0.5 V or more) 5 digits or 1 mV<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V
MINimum→ -10 V/open, -5 V/50Ω
MAXimum → 10 V/open, 5 V/50Ω

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

115

Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer
Sets the center value of DC offset of CH1 to 2.5 V

2.3.8.31

2.5V

DC offset sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN□[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN?
Description
Sets/queries the span value of DC offset
Setting parameter<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum<offset> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → DC offset: 0 V to 20 V/open, 0 V to 10V/50Ω,† Resolution depends on the start value and stop value.
<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V
MINimum→ 0V
MAXimum → 20 V/open, 10 V/50Ω
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN
Sets the span value of DC offset of CH1 to 2.5 V

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2.5V

116

2.3.8.32

DC offset sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet■[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet□[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet?
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of DC offset
Setting parameter<offset>|CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum<offset> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Marker value: ± 10 Vp-p/open, ± 5Vp-p/50Ω,Resolution: (± 499.9 mV or less) 4 digits or 0.1 mV,(± 0.5 V or more) 5 digits or 1 mV<eunits> ::= M<units>::= V
CENTer→ Center value of the DC offset sweep
MINimum→ -10 V/open, -5 V/50Ω
MAXimum → 10 V/open, 5 V/50Ω
Query parameter[CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum]
CENTer→ Queries the center value of amplitude sweep
MINimum→ Queries the minimum value
MAXimum → Queries the maximum value
Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:MARKer:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet
Sets the marker value of DC offset of CH1 to 2.5 V

2.3.8.33

2.5V

DC offset sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SWAP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SWAP
Description
Swaps the start value with stop value of the DC offset sweep
Setting parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1172.3.8.34

DC offset sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STATe
Description
Switch the state of DC offset sweep
Setting parameter
STARt|STOP
STARt
STOP

→
→

Switches the output to the start value
Switches the output to the stop value

Setting example:SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet:STATe STARt
Switches the state of DC offset sweep of CH1 to the start value

2.3.8.35

Duty sweep
starting value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt?
Description
Sets/queries the start value of duty sweep
Setting parameter<duty>|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → (Square wave (duty variable range standard))
Start value: 0.0100% to 99.9900%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend))
Start value: 0.0000% to 100.0000%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Pulse wave)
Start value: 0.0170% to 99.9830%, Resolution: 0.0001%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 0.0100%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 0.0000%,(Pulse wave) 0.0170%
MAXimum → (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 99.9900%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 100.0000%,(Pulse wave) 99.9830%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt 20PCT
Sets the start value of duty sweep of CH1 to 20%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1182.3.8.36

Duty sweep
stop value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP?
Description
Sets/queries the stop value of duty sweep
Setting parameter<duty>|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → (Square wave (duty variable range standard))
Stop value: 0.0100% to 99.9900%, Resolution :0.0001%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend))
Stop value: 0.0000% to 100.0000%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Pulse wave)
Stop value :0.0170% to 99.9830%, Resolution :0.0001%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 0.0100%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 0.0000%,(Pulse wave) 0.0170%
MAXimum → (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 99.9900%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 100.0000%,(Pulse wave) 99.9830%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP 20PCT
Sets the stop value of duty sweep of CH1 to 20%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1192.3.8.37

Duty sweep
center value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer?
Description
Sets/queries the center value of duty sweep
Setting parameter<duty>|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → (Square wave (duty variable range standard))
Center value: 0.0100% to 99.9900%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend))
Center value: 0.0000% to 100.0000%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Pulse wave)
Center value: 0.0170% to 99.9830%, Resolution: 0.0001%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 0.0100%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 0.0000%,(Pulse wave) 0.0170%
MAXimum → (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 99.9900%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 100.0000%,(Pulse wave) 99.9830%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer 20PCT
Sets the center value of duty sweep of CH1 to 20%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)120

2.3.8.38

Duty sweep
span value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN□[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN?
Description
Sets/queries the span value of duty sweep
Setting parameter<duty>|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → (Square wave (duty variable range standard))
Span value: 0.0000% to 99.9800%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend))
Span value: 0.0000% to 100.0000%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Pulse wave)
Span value: 0.0000% to 99.9660%, Resolution: 0.0001%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ 0.0000%
MAXimum → (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 99.9800%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 100.0000%,(Pulse wave) 99.9660%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN 20PCT
Sets the span value of duty sweep of CH1 to 20%

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1212.3.8.39

Duty sweep
marker value setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PULSe:DCYCle■[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PULSe:DCYCle□[:SOURce[1|2]]:MARKer:PULSe:DCYCle?
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of duty sweep
Setting parameter<duty>|CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum<duty> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → (Square wave (duty variable range standard))
Marker value: 0.0100% to 99.9900%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend))
Marker value: 0.0000% to 100.0000%, Resolution: 0.0001%,(Pulse wave)
Marker value: 0.0170% to 99.9830%, Resolution: 0.0001%<units>::= PCT
CENTer→ Center value of duty sweep
MINimum→ (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 0.0100%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 0.0000%,(Pulse wave) 0.0170%
MAXimum → (Square wave (duty variable range standard)) 99.9900%,(Square wave (duty variable range extend)) 100.0000%,(Pulse wave) 99.9830%
Query parameter[CENTer|MINimum|MAXimum]
CENTer→ Queries the center value of duty sweep
MINimum→ Queries the minimum value
MAXimum → Queries the maximum value
Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:MARKer:PULSe:DCYCle 20PCT
Sets the marker value of duty sweep of CH1 to 20%

2.3.8.40

Duty sweep
start/stop value swapping setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SWAP■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:SWAP
Description
Swaps the start value with stop value of the duty sweep
Setting parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1222.3.8.41

Duty sweep
start/stop value output setting[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe
Description
Switches the state of duty sweep
Setting parameter
STARt|STOP
STARt
STOP

→
→

Switches the output to the start value
Switches the output to the stop value

Setting example:SOURce1:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe STARt
Switches the state of duty sweep of CH1 to the start value

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1232.3.9 Burst Oscillation Mode Command Details
2.3.9.1

Burst oscillation
burst mode selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:MODE■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:MODE□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:MODE?
Description
Selects/queries the burst mode
Setting parameter
AUTO|TRIGger|GATE|TGATe
AUTO → Auto burst
TRIGger → Trigger burst
GATE→ GateTGATe → Trigger gate
Query parameter
None
Response format
AUTO|TRIG|GATE|TGAT† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:MODE AUTO
Sets the burst mode of CH1 to auto burst

2.3.9.2

Burst oscillation
stop level setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel?
Description
Sets/queries the stop level value of burst
Setting parameter<level>|MAXimum|MINimum<level> ::= <REAL>[<units>]<REAL> → Stop level value: -100.00% to 100.00%,
Resolution: 0.01%<units>::= PCT
MINimum→ -100.00%
MAXimum → 100.00%
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

124

Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:SLEVel 20PCT
Sets the stop level value of burst of CH1 to 20%

2.3.9.3

Burst oscillation
stop level selection/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel:STATe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel:STATe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:SLEVel:STATe?
Description
Selects/queries the stop level of burst oscillation
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Disable
1/ON: Enable
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0: Disable
1: Enable
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:SLEVel:STATe ON
Sets the stop level of burst oscillation of CH1 to enable

2.3.9.4

Burst oscillationsynchronization signal output selection/query:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:BURSt:TYPE■:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:BURSt:TYPE□:OUTPut[1|2]:SYNC:BURSt:TYPE?
Description
Selects/queries the burst synchronization output
Setting parameter
SYNC|BSYNc
SYNC
BSYNc

→
→

Reference phase synchronization
Burst synchronization

Query parameter
None
Response format
SYNC|BSYN† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:OUTPut1:SYNC:BURSt:TYPE SYNC
Sets the burst synchronization output of CH1 to reference phase synchronization

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1252.3.9.5

Burst oscillation
auto burst mode: mark wave number setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:NCYCles■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:NCYCles□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:NCYCles?
Description
Sets/queries the mark wave number of auto burst
Setting parameter<mark>|MINimum|MAXimum<mark> ::= <REAL><REAL> → Mark wave number: 0.5 waves to 999,999.5 waves,
Resolution: 0.5 waves
MINimum→ 0.5 waves
MAXimum → 999,999.5 waves
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:AUTO:NCYCles 10
Sets the mark wave number of auto burst of CH1 to 10 waves

2.3.9.6

Burst oscillation
auto burst mode: space wave number setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:SPACe■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:SPACe□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:AUTO:SPACe?
Description
Sets/queries the space wave number of auto burst
Setting parameter<mark>|MINimum|MAXimum<mark> ::= <REAL><REAL> → Space wave number: 0.5 waves to 999,999.5 waves,
Resolution: 0.5 waves
MINimum→ 0.5 waves
MAXimum → 999,999.5 waves
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

126

Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:AUTO:SPACe 10
Sets the space wave number of auto burst of CH1 to 10 waves

2.3.9.7

Burst oscillation
trigger burst mode: mark wave number setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:NCYCles■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:NCYCles□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:NCYCles?
Description
Sets/queries the mark wave number of trigger burst
Setting parameter<mark>|MINimum|MAXimum<mark> ::= <REAL><REAL> → Mark wave number: 0.5 waves to 999,999.5 waves,
Resolution: 0.5 waves
MINimum→ 0.5 waves
MAXimum → 999,999.5 waves
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:TRIGger:NCYCles 10
Sets the mark wave number of trigger burst of CH1 to 10 waves

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1272.3.9.8

Burst oscillation
trigger burst mode: trigger delay time setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:TDELay■[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:TDELay□[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt[:TRIGger]:TDELay?
Description
Sets/queries the trigger delay time of trigger burst
Setting parameter<delay>|MINimum|MAXimum<delay> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Trigger delay time: 0.0 μs to 100 s,
Resolution: 5 digits or 0.1 μs<eunits> ::= MA|K|M|U|N<units>::= S
MINimum→ 0.0μs
MAXimum → 100s
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:TRIGger:TDELay 10MS
Sets the trigger delay time of trigger burst of CH1 to 10 ms

2.3.9.9

Burst oscillationgate mode: oscillation stop unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:GATE:OSTop■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:GATE:OSTop□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:GATE:OSTop?
Description
Selects/queries the oscillation stop unit of gate
Setting parameter
HALF|CYCLe
HALF
CYCLe

→
→

Half cycle
1 cycleQuery parameter
None
Response format
HALF|CYCL† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:GATE:OSTop HALF
Sets the oscillation stop unit of gate of CH1 to half cycle

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1282.3.9.10

Burst oscillation
triggered gate mode: oscillation stop unit setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:TGATe:OSTop■ [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:TGATe:OSTop□ [:SOURce[1|2]]:BURSt:TGATe:OSTop?
Description
Selects/queries the oscillation stop unit of triggered gate
Setting parameter
HALF|CYCLe
HALF
CYCLe

→
→

Half cycle
1 cycleQuery parameter
None
Response format
HALF|CYCL† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:SOURce1:BURSt:TGATe:OSTop HALF
Sets the oscillation stop unit of triggered gate of CH1 to half cycle

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1292.3.10 Memory Operation Command Details
2.3.10.1

Basic setting memory
clear:MEMory:STATe:DELete■:MEMory:STATe:DELete
Description
Clears the setting memory
Setting parameter<memory>|MINimum|MAXimum<memory>::= <INT><INT>→ Memory number : 1 to 10
MINimum→ 1
MAXimum→ 10

2.3.10.2

Basic setting memory
store
*SAV
■*SAV
Description
Stores to the setting memory
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 1 to 10

2.3.10.3

Basic setting memory
recall*RCL■*RCL
Description
Recalls from the setting memory
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 1 to 10

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1302.3.10.4

Arbitrary waveform memory
arbitrary waveform data transfer/read-out{:TRACe|DATA} [:DATA]■{:TRACe|DATA} [:DATA]□{:TRACe|DATA} [:DATA]?
Description
Transfers/reads out the arbitrary wave data
Setting parameter<memory>,[<name>],<data><memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128<name> ::= <STR><STR> → Arbitrary wave name (20 characters or less)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)† If the arbitrary wave name is less than 20 characters, the remaining
characters are filled with spaces (with the ASCII code 32).
<data> ::= <BLK><BLK> → Arbitrary wave data
(Data formats)Array format#<digit><byte><format><number><data[0]>…<data[n-1]>#→ Start of the binary data
<digit> → The number of digits of subsequent <byte><byte> → The number of bytes of subsequent data
<format> → Data format (4 bytes)† Specify 0 for the array format<number> → The number of data points (4 bytes)<data[i]> → i-th value (2 bytes)
Control point format#<digit><byte><format><number><x[0]><y[0]>…<x[n-1]><y[n-1]>#→ Start of the binary data
<digit> → The number of digits of subsequent <byte><byte> → The number of bytes of subsequent data
<format> → Data format (4 bytes)† Specify 1 for the control point format<number> → The number of data points (4 bytes)<x[i]>→ x value of i-th control point (4 bytes)<y[i]>→ y value of i-th control point (2 bytes)† Save the arbitrary data of <data> as the arbitrary wave name of <name> to the memory
number of <memory>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)131

Query parameter<memory><memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number: 0 to 128
Response format<name>,<data><name> ::= <STR><STR> → Arbitrary wave name (20 characters)<data> ::= <BLK>† For <BLK>, see the setting parameter
Remarks <format>, <number>, <data[i]>, <x[i]>, and <y[i]> are binary data.
(Big endian)<data[i]> is the two's complement form and from -32767 (H'8001) to 32767 (H'7FFF).
If a value is -32768 (H'8000), set it as -32767 (H'8001).
The control point <x[i]> is treated as a numeric value of X axis from 0 up to 31th power of two.
The numeric range is expressed as a range from H'00000000 to H'7FFFFFFF in hexadecimal.
If data exceeds the setting range, it is treated as an error and no command is executed.
The control point <x[i]> must be sorted in ascending order from the beginning of data.
If it is not sorted, an error occurs.
The control point <y[i]> is treated as a numeric value of Y axis from -32767 to 32767.
The numeric range is expressed as a range from H'8001 to H'7FFF in hexadecimal.
The value 0 is expressed as H'0000.
-32768 (H'8000) is set as -32767 (H’8001).
If the amplitude width of actual signal output is ±1.0 Vp-p, 1 LSB† All of the logical signal output values are not guaranteed.

1/32767 V is used.

Arbitrary wave memory number 0 is the edit memory.
The arbitrary wave name of the memory number 0 is "<Edit Memory>"(20 characters).
Array format data cannot be set for the arbitrary wave memory number 0.
Arbitrary wave name cannot be set for the arbitrary wave memory number 0.
If it is specified, it is ignored.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1322.3.10.5

Arbitrary waveform memory
store{:TRACe|DATA}:STORe■ {:TRACe|DATA}:STORe
Description
Saves the contents of edit memory (memory number 0) as an arbitrary wave file to thememorySetting parameter<file>,<name><file> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number of location to save: 1 to 128<name> ::= <STR><STR> → Arbitrary wave name (20 characters or less)† Optional (if omitted, nothing is changed)† If the arbitrary wave name is less than 20 characters, the remaining
characters are filled with spaces (with the ASCII code 32).
Setting example:TRACe:STORe 2,"name"
Saves the contents of edit memory as the arbitrary wave name "name" to the memory
number 2

2.3.10.6

Arbitrary waveform memory
recall{:TRACe|DATA}:RECall■ {:TRACe|DATA}:RECall
Description
Reads the arbitrary wave file of the specified memory number into the edit memory (memory
number 0)
Setting parameter<file><file>::= <INT><INT> →

Memory number of calling source: 1 to 128

Setting example:TRACe:STORe:RECall 2
Reads the contents of memory number 2 into the edit memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1332.3.10.7

Arbitrary waveform memory
copy{:TRACe|DATA}:COPY■{:TRACe|DATA}:COPY
Description
Copies the arbitrary wave data.
Setting parameter<memory>,[<name>],<chan>,<wave><memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128<name> ::= <STR><STR> → Arbitrary wave name (20 characters)† Optional (If omitted, the destination name is assumed.)† If the arbitrary wave name is less than 20 characters, the remaining
characters are filled with spaces (with the ASCII code 32).
<chan> ::= <INT><INT> → Channel number:1 to 2
<wave> ::= SINusoid|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP
SINusoid → Sine wave
SQUare → Square wave
PULSe
→ Pulse wave
RAMP
→ Ramp wave
USER
→ Arbitrary wave
† Copy the waveform <wave> of the channel number <chan> as the arbitrary wave name<name> to the memory number <memory>.
Setting example:TRACe:COPY 1,"name",1,SINusoid
Copies the waveform memory of sine wave of CH1 as the arbitrary wave name "name" to thearbitrary wave memory 1
Remarks
 Memory number 0 is the edit memory.
 The arbitrary wave name of the memory number 0 is "<Edit Memory> "(20 characters).
 The arbitrary wave data of the memory selected in "[:SOURce[1|2]]:FUNCtion:USER" iscopied as a copy of arbitrary wave.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1342.3.10.8

Arbitrary waveform memory
delete{:TRACe|DATA}:DELete■ {:TRACe|DATA}:DELete
Description
Deletes the arbitrary wave memory
Setting parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Setting example:TRACe:DELete 1
Deletes the memory number 1
Remarks
 Memory number 0 is the edit memory.
 Specifying the memory number 0 gives the same effect as the case of operating the [New]soft-key in the Edit arbitrary waveform screen on the main unit.

2.3.10.9

Arbitrary waveform memory
information acquisition{:TRACe|DATA}:INFormation?
□{:TRACe|DATA}:INFormation?
Description
Acquires the information of arbitrary wave memory
Query parameter<memory> ::= <INT><INT> → Memory number : 0 to 128
Response format<name>,<format>,<number><name>::= <STR><STR>→ Arbitrary wave name (20 characters)<format> ::= <INT><INT>→ Data format
0→ Array format
1→ Control point format<number> ::= <INT><INT> → The number of data points

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1352.3.11 Status System Command Details
2.3.11.1 Status register and related queue clear
*CLS
■*CLS
Description
Clears event register and error queue
Setting parameter
None
Remarks
The following registers are cleared:- Status byte register- Standard event status register- Operation status event register- CH1 operation status event register- CH2 operation status event register- Questionable data status event register- Warning event register- CH1 warning event register- CH2 warning event register- Error queueThis command can clear the overload message (No.23133).

2.3.11.2

Status reporting related preset setting:STATus:PRESet■:STATus:PRESet
Description
Presets the registers
Parameters
None
Remarks† The following registers are cleared by this command:- Operation status transition filter (negative)- Operation status transition filter (positive)- Operation status enable register- CH1 operation status transition filter (negative)- CH1 operation status transition filter (positive)- CH1 operation status enable register- CH2 operation status transition filter (negative)- CH2 operation status transition filter (positive)- CH2 operation status enable register- Questionable data status transition filter (negative)- Questionable data status transition filter (positive)- Questionable data status enable register- Warning event enable register- CH1 warning event enable register- CH2 warning event enable register

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1362.3.11.3

Status register at power-on clear flag setting/query
*PSC
■*PSC
□*PSC?
Description
Sets/queries the power-on status clear flag
Setting parameter<state> ::= <INT><INT>→ 0:OFF
1:ON
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example*PSC 1
Sets the automatic clear of the enable register, etc. at power-on to enable

2.3.11.4

Status byte register query*STB?
□*STB?
Description
Queries the status byte register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.5

Service request enable register setting/query
*SRE
■*SRE
□*SRE?
Description
Sets/queries the service request enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example*SRE 8
Sets the service request enable register to 8

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1372.3.11.6

Standard event status register query*ESR?
□*ESR?
Description
Queries the standard event status register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.7

Standard event enable register setting/query
*ESE
■*ESE
□*ESE?
Description
Sets/queries the standard event status enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example*ESE 8
Sets the standard event status enable register to 8

2.3.11.8

Condition register query:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
□:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Description
Queries the operation status condition register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1382.3.11.9

Transition filter register (negative) setting/query:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition■:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition□:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the operation status transition filter (negative)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 512
Set the bit 9 of the operation status transition filter (negative) to 1

2.3.11.10 Transition filter register (positive) setting/query:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition■:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition□:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the operation status transition filter (positive)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 512
Set the bit 9 of the operation status transition filter (positive) to 1

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1392.3.11.11 Event register query:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the operation status event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:EVENt?
Queries the operation status event register

2.3.11.12 Event enable register setting/query:STATus:OPERation:ENABle■:STATus:OPERation:ENABle□:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the operation status event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:ENABle 512
Sets the bit 9 of the operation status event enable register to 1

2.3.11.13 Operation status register group (CH1)
Condition register query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:CONDition?
□:STATus:OPERation:CH1:CONDition?
Description
Queries the CH1 operation status condition register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1402.3.11.14 Operation status register group (CH1)
Transition filter register (negative) setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:NTRansition■:STATus:OPERation:CH1:NTRansition□:STATus:OPERation:CH1:NTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the CH1 operation status transition filter (negative)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:CH1:NTRansition 8
Set the bit 3 of the CH1 operation status transition filter (negative) to 1

2.3.11.15 Operation status register group (CH1)
Transition filter register (positive) setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:PTRansition■:STATus:OPERation:CH1:PTRansition□:STATus:OPERation:CH1:PTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the CH1 operation status transition filter (positive)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:CH1:PTRansition 8
Set the bit 3 of the CH1 operation status transition filter (positive) to 1

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1412.3.11.16 Operation status register group (CH1)
Event register query:STATus:OPERation:CH1[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:OPERation:CH1[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the CH1 operation status event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.17 Operation status register group (CH1)
Event enable register setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle■:STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle□:STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the operation status event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle 8
Sets the bit 3 of the operation status event enable register to 1

2.3.11.18 Operation status register group (CH2)
condition register query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:CONDition?
□:STATus:OPERation:CH2:CONDition?
Description
Queries the CH2 operation status condition register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1422.3.11.19 Operation status register group (CH2)transition filter register (negative) setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:NTRansition■:STATus:OPERation:CH2:NTRansition□:STATus:OPERation:CH2:NTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the CH2 operation status transition filter (negative)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:CH2:NTRansition 8
Set the bit 3 of the CH2 operation status transition filter (negative) to 1

2.3.11.20 Operation status register group (CH2)transition filter register (positive) setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:PTRansition■:STATus:OPERation:CH2:PTRansition□:STATus:OPERation:CH2:PTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the CH2 operation status transition filter (positive)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:CH2:PTRansition 8
Set the bit 3 of the CH2 operation status transition filter (positive) to 1

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1432.3.11.21 Operation status register group (CH2)
event Register setting:STATus:OPERation:CH2[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:OPERation:CH2[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the CH2 operation status event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.22 Operation status register group (CH2)
event enable register setting/query:STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle■:STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle□:STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the operation status event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle 8
Sets the bit 3 of the operation status event enable register to 1

2.3.11.23 Questionable Data Status Register Groupcondition register query:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
□:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
Description
Queries the questionable data status condition register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

144

2.3.11.24 Questionable Data Status Register Grouptransition filter register (negative) setting/query:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition■:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition□:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the questionable data status transition filter (negative)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 16
Sets the bit 4 of questionable data status transition filter (negative) to 1

2.3.11.25 Questionable Data Status Register Grouptransition filter register (positive) setting/query:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition■:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition□:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?
Description
Sets/queries the questionable data status transition filter (positive)
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 16
Sets the bit 4 of questionable data status transition filter (positive) to 1

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1452.3.11.26 Questionable Data Status Register Group
event register query:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the questionable data status event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.27 Questionable Data Status Register Group
event enable register setting/query:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle■:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle□:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the questionable data status event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 16
Sets the bit 4 of the questionable data status event enable register to 1

2.3.11.28 Warning Event Register Group
event register query:STATus:WARNing[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:WARNing[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the warning event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1462.3.11.29 Warning Event Register Group
event enable register setting/query:STATus:WARNing:ENABle■:STATus:WARNing:ENABle□:STATus:WARNing:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the warning event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:WARNing:ENABle 512
Sets the bit 9 of the warning event enable register to 1

2.3.11.30 Warning Event Register Group (CH1)
event register query:STATus:WARNing:CH1[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:WARNing:CH1[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the CH1 warning event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.31 Warning Event Register Group (CH1)
event enable register setting/query:STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle■:STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle□:STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the CH1 warning event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

147

Setting example:STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle 16
Sets the bit 4 of the CH1 warning event enable register to 1

2.3.11.32 Warning Event Register Group (CH2)
event register query:STATus:WARNing:CH2[:EVENt]?
□:STATus:WARNing:CH2[:EVENt]?
Description
Queries the CH2 warning event register
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>

2.3.11.33 Warning Event Register Group (CH2)
event enable register setting/query:STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle■:STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle□:STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle?
Description
Sets/queries the CH2 warning event enable register
Setting parameter<value> ::= <INT><INT> → For setting value, see "3. Status System."Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>
Setting example:STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle 16
Sets the bit 4 of the CH2 warning event enable register to 1

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

148

2.3.12 Channel Operation 2-channel Equipment (WF1948) Command Details
2.3.12.1

2-channel equipment (WF1948)
channel mode setting/query:CHANnel:MODE■:CHANnel:MODE□:CHANnel:MODE?
Description
Selects/queries the channel mode
Setting parameter
INDependent|PHASe|TONE|RATio|DIFFerential
INDependent → IndependentPHASe→ 2 phase
TONE→ Constant frequency difference
RATio→ Constant frequency ratio
DIFFerential → Differential output
Query parameter
None
Response format
IND|PHAS|TONE|RAT|DIFF† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:CHANnel:MODE INDependent
Sets the channel mode to independent
Remarks† This command can use only for 2-channel machine

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)149

2.3.12.2

2-channel equipment (WF1948)
2-channel same value operation setting/query:INSTrument:COUPle■:INSTrument:COUPle□:INSTrument:COUPle?
Description
Selects/queries the 2-channel equivalence setting
Setting parameter
ALL|NONE
ALL
NONE

→
→

Equivalence setting
Equivalence settingonoff

Query parameter
None
Response format
ALL|NONE† For the meaning of each response data, see the setting parameter
Setting example:INSTrument:COUPle ALL
2-channel equivalence setting is used
Remarks† This command can use only for 2-channel machine

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1502.3.12.3

2-channel equipment (WF1948)
constant frequency difference mode: frequency difference setting/query:CHANnel:DELTa■:CHANnel:DELTa□:CHANnel:DELTa?
Description
Sets/queries the frequency difference of the constant frequency difference
Setting parameter<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum<frequency> ::= <REAL>[<eunits>][<units>]<REAL> → Frequency difference: (CH2 frequency - CH1 frequency),
Resolution: 0.01 μHz<eunits> ::= M|K|U|N<units>::= HZ
MINimum→ Sets the minimum value
MAXimum → Sets the maximum value
Query parameter[MINimum|MAXimum]
MINimum→
MAXimum →Queries the minimum value
Queries the maximum value

Response format<NR3>
Setting example:CHANnel:DELTa 1KHZ
Sets the frequency difference to 1 kHz
Remarks† This command can use only for 2-channel machine

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1512.3.12.4

2-channel equipment (WF1948)
constant frequency ratio mode: frequency ratio setting/query:CHANnel:RATio■:CHANnel:RATio□:CHANnel:RATio?
Description
Sets/queries the frequency ration of the constant frequency ratio
Setting parameter<value1>|MINimum|MAXimum,<value2>|MINimum|MAXimum<value1> ::= <INT><INT> → Frequency ratio of CH1: 1 to 9,999,999<value2> ::= <INT><INT> → Frequency ratio of CH2: 1 to 9,999,999
MINimum→ 1
MAXimum → 9,999,999
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1>,<NR1>
Setting example:CHANnel:RATio 2,3
Sets the frequency ratio to 2:3
Remarks† This command can use only for 2-channel machine

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1522.3.13 Other Operations Command Details
2.3.13.1

Equipment-specific information query*IDN?
□*IDN?
Description
Reads the ID of equipment
Query parameter
None
Response format<corporation>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware><corporation> → Manufacturer: NF Corporation<model>→ Model: (Example) WF1947<serial>→ Serial number: (Example) 1234567<firmware> → Firmware version: (Example) Ver1.00

2.3.13.2

Error message query:SYSTem:ERRor?
□:SYSTem:ERRor?
Description
Queries errors
Query parameter
None
Response format<code>,<message><code> ::= <INT><INT>→ Error code
<message> ::= <STR><STR>→ Error message

2.3.13.3

Setting initialization (status registers, etc. not cleared)
*RST
■*RST
Description
Initializes the setting
Setting parameter
None

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1532.3.13.4

Operation completion event bit setting
*OPC
■*OPC
Description
Sets the OPC bit to 1 when all the previous commands are completed
Setting parameter
None

2.3.13.5

Setting output key to 1 at operation completion*OPC?
□*OPC?
Description
Sets the output buffer to 1 when all the previous commands are completed
Query parameter
None

2.3.13.6

Waiting for command/query execution
*WAI
■*WAI
Description
Waits for completion of all the previous commands execution
Setting parameter
None

2.3.13.7

Self diagnosis result query*TST?
□*TST?
Description
Queries the self diagnosis result
Query parameter
None
Response format<NR1> →

0Remarks
This instrument always responds with 0.
External control cannot check the internal state. Use the panel operation to check theinternal state.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)1542.3.13.8

External reference frequency input setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:SOURce■[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:SOURce□[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:SOURce?
Description
Sets/queries the reference frequency source
Setting parameter
INTernal|EXTernal
INTernal
EXTernal→→

Internal clock
External reference frequency input

Query parameter
None
Response format
INT|EXT
Setting example:SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal
Sets the reference frequency source to internal clock
Remarks† Specifying "[1|2]" does not affect the operation.

2.3.13.9

External reference frequency output setting/query[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:OUTPut[:STATe]■[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:OUTPut[:STATe]□[:SOURce[1|2]]:ROSCillator:OUTPut[:STATe]?
Description
Selects/queries the reference frequency output on/off
Setting parameter<state> ::= <BOL><BOL>→ 0/OFF: Output Off
1/ON: Output On
Query parameter
None
Response format<NBOL><NBOL> → 0 : Output Off
1 : Output On
Setting example:ROSCillator:OUTPut:STATe ON
Set the reference frequency output to on
Remarks† Specifying "[1|2]" does not affect the operation.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

155

2.4

Trigger/Oscillation Status Control

WF1947/WF1948 provides the commands to give a trigger from the external control (GET (Group Execute
Trigger) and "*TRG") and the command to control an oscillation status (":TRIGger[1|2]:SELected:EXEcute").
These commands may be disabled depending on the oscillation mode as shown in Table 2.3. If a disabledcommand is received, it is ignored.
Table 2.3 Enable/disable of Trigger/Oscillation Status Control Commands for Each
Oscillation Mode
GET/*TRG/:TRIGger[1|2][:SEQuence][:IMMediate]:TRIGger[1|2]:SELected:EXEcuteContinuous

DisableDisableModulation

DisableEnableContinuous

DisableEnableSingleEnableEnableGated single

EnableEnableAuto burst

DisableDisableTrigger burst

EnableDisableGate

DisableDisableTriggered gate

EnableDisableOscillation mode

Sweep

Burst

In above commands, channel cannot be specified for GET and "*TRG" since they assume CH1. However,when 2-channel equivalence setting is on, CH1 and CH2 are used for target (WF1948 only).

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

156

2.5

System Unit

The system unit is assumed to be a default unit in the setting/query of parameters such as the frequency andamplitude with the external control. Changing the system unit is not reflected on this device screen. If youomit the unit in the parameter setting, the system unit is assumed to be the unit when executing a command.
When you query parameters, the response message is returned based on the system unit.
For example, when the system unit of amplitude is Vrms, this instrument sets the amplitude as shown below.
When the unit is specified as Vp-p::SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 1.0Vpp→ Sets the amplitude to 1.0 Vp-p because this instrument interprets the command in the specified unit.
When the unit is omitted::SOURce1:VOLTage:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude 1.0→ Sets the amplitude to 1.0 Vrms because this instrument interprets the command that the system unit isspecified as the unit.

The following commands are used to set the system unit:
Setting of system unit for frequency:[:SOURce[1|2]]:FREQuency:UNIT
Setting of system unit for amplitude:[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:AMPLitude:UNIT
Setting of system units for DC offset, high level, and low level:[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT[:SOURce[1|2]]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT† One system unit is shared with DC offset, high level, and low level. The above three commands have thesame function.
Setting of system unit for phase:[:SOURce[1|2]]:PHASe:UNIT
Setting of system unit for duty of square wave/pulse:[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT
Setting of system unit for period:[:SOURce[1|2]]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)157

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)158

3. Status System
3.1 Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register ························································· 160
3.2 Standard Event Status Register Group·················································································· 162
3.3 Operation Status Register Group /Questionable Data Status Register Group ····································································· 163
3.4 Warning Event Register Group ·························································································· 172
3.5 Others ························································································································ 174

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)159

WF1947/WF1948 provide the status reporting function defined in IEEE488.2.

3.1

Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register

The configuration of the service byte register and the service request enable register is shown in Figure 3.1.

RQS
Servicerequestgeneration

7
CPR

6

Status byte register

5
ESB

4
MAV

3
QUE

2
ERR

1
WAR

0

MSS

&

&
&

Logical
Sum

&
&
&
&

7

5

4

3

2

1

0

Service request enable register

Figure 3.1

Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

160

3.1.1 Status Byte Register
Each bit of the status byte register is described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
Bit

WeightStatus Byte Register

Symbol0

Contents(Unused)

1

2

WAR

Warning event register summary

2

4

ERR

Error queue summary

3

8

QUE

Questionable data status register summary

4

16

MAV

Message queue summary

5

32

ESB

Event summary bit

664

RQS/MSS

7

128

OPR

Request service/master summary status
Operation status register summary

The status byte register is cleared when a *CLS command is received.

3.1.2 Service Request Enable Register
The service request enable register is used to select the summary bit within the status byte register thatgenerates service requests shown in Figure 3.1. The service request enable register is cleared when the poweris turned on while the power on status clear flag (set in *PSC ) is set to TRUE .

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

161

3.2

Standard Event Status Register GroupThe standard event status register group is shown in Figure 3.2.
Standard event status register
Standard event status enable register

PON

7

7

URQ

6

6

CME

5

5

EXE

4

4

DDE

3

3

QYE

2

2

RQC

1

1

OPC

0

0

LogicalSum

Event summary bit (ESB)

Figure 3.2

Standard Event Status Register Group

3.2.1 Standard Event Status Register
Each bit of the standard event status register is shown in Table 3.2 .
Table 3.2

Standard Event Status Register

Bit

WeightSymbolContents

0

1

OPC

Operation completion

1

2

RQC

Request control

2

4

QYE

Query error

3

8

DDE

Equipment-specific error

4

16

EXE

Execution error

5

32

CME

Command error

6

64

URQ

User request

7

128

PON

Power onThe standard event status register is cleared when the *ESR? query or *CLS command is received.

3.2.2 Standard Event Status Enable Register
The standard event status enable register is used to select the bit of the standard event status register as shownin Figure 3.2, and reflect the status of the selected bit to the ESB of the status byte register.

The standard event status enable register is cleared when the power is turned on while the power on statusclear flag (set in *PSC) is set to TRUE.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

162

3.3

Operation Status Register Group /Questionable Data Status Register GroupThe configuration of the operation status register group and the questionable data status register group is
shown in Figure 3.3.
Condition register
Transition filter register
Event register

15

15

15

15

14

14

14

14

:
:

:
:

:
:

:
:

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

Event enable register

&

15
14

&

:
:

&

2
&

1
&

0

Logical Sum

Status byte register (summary bit)

Figure 3.3

Operation Status Register Group/
Questionable Data Status Register Group

3.3.1 Overview of Registers
3.3.1.1

Condition register

The condition register shows the current status of WF1947/WF1948. This register is not cleared even when aquery addressed to the condition register is received.

3.3.1.2

Transition filter register

The transition filter register is used to determine the event bit transition. The relationship between thetransition filter setting and the event register transition is shown in Table 3.3.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

163

Table 3.3

Transition Filter and Event Register Transition

Each bit setting of positivetransition filter

Each bit setting of negativetransition filter

Transition of condition registerto make each bit of event register 1

1

0

0→1

0

1

1→0

1

1

0 → 1 or 1 → 0

00Each bit of event register bit
is not made 1.

The transition filter register is cleared when :STATus:PRESet command is received or when the power on isturned on while the power on status clear flag (set in *PSC) is set to TRUE.

3.3.1.3

Event register

The event register is a register that reflects the changes of the condition register according to the setting of thetransition filter register. The event register is cleared upon reception of a query addressed to the event registeror the *CLS command.

3.3.1.4

Event enable register

The event enable register is used to select bits in the event register to be summarized.
The event enable register is used to select the bit of the event register as shown in Figure 3.3, and reflect thestatus of the selected bit to the summary bit of the status byte register.
The event enable register is cleared when :STATus:PRESet command is received or when the power on isturned on while the power on status clear flag (set in *PSC) is set to TRUE.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1643.3.2 Operation Status Register GroupThe operation status register group is shown in Figure 3.3. This register group has one register set for eachchannel and one register set to summarize their sets. Content of each operation status register is described inTable 3.4 and Table 3.5.
Table 3.4
Bit

WeightOperation Status Register
Contents

0( Non-use )1( Non-use )2( Non-use )3( Non-use )4( Non-use )5( Non-use )6( Non-use )7( Non-use )8( Non-use )9512

CH1 operation status register summary

10

1024

CH2 operation status register summary11( Non-use )12( Non-use )13( Reserved )14( Reserved )15

Always 0

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

165

Table 3.5
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Weight

8

256

9

512

10

1024

11

2048

12
13
14
15

128

CH1 (CH2) Operation Status Register
Contents(Unused)(Unused)(Unused)(Unused)(Unused)(Unused)(Unused)Modulation/sweep/burst: STOP
Shows the status such as the Stop and Conflict status in which the primaryoscillation mode is not made.
Even if the status is Run, this bit is set to 1 during the trigger delay period in thetrigger burst or during the oscillation period of the half wave and full-wave after
the triggered gate is closed.
Continuous oscillation/modulation/sweep/burst: RUN
Shows the Run status and Hold status.
Sweep: HOLD
Shows the Hold status.
Sweep/burst: TRIGGER WAIT
Shows the TrigWait status.
Modulation/sweep/burst: CONFLICT
Shows the Conflict status.
(Unused)(Unused)(Unused)Always 0

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

166

The relationship between each bit in Table 3.5 and the output waveform is shown below.

3.3.2.1

Continuous oscillation
Run

Status ofequipment

STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.4

3.3.2.2

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Continuous
Oscillation

Modulation

Confilct

Run

Stop

Stop

Status ofequipment

Restriction
release
STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.5[START][STOP]

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Modulation

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

167

3.3.2.3

Sweep

Confilct

TrigWait

Run

TrigWait

Run

TrigWait

Run

Hold

Run

TrigWait

Status ofequipment
Stop value

Start value

Restriction
release
STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10[START][STOP][START] [STOP][START] [HOLD][RESUME] [STOP]

Figure 3.6 Relationship between Output andOperation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Single-Shot Sweep or Gated Single-Shot Sweep
Confilct

Status ofequipment

Run

Stop

Hold

Run

Stop

Stop value

Start value

Restriction
release

STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.7[START][STOP][HOLD][RESUME] [STOP]

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Continuous Sweep

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

168

3.3.2.4

Burst

Status ofequipment

Run

Confilct

Stop value

Start value

Restriction
release

STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.8

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Auto Burst

Confilct

TrigWait

Run

TrigWait

Run

TrigWait

Status ofequipment

DELAY

Restriction TRIGGER
release
STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.9

DELAY

TRIGGER

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Trigger Burst

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

169

Status ofequipment

Confilct

Stop

Stop

Run

Run

Stop

Restriction
releaseGate signal

1
0

STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.10

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Gate

Confilct

TrigWait

Run

TrigWait

Run

TrigWait

Status ofequipment

Restriction TRIGGER
release

STOP

1
0

RUN

1
0

HOLD

1
0

TRIGGER
WAIT

1
0

CONFLICT

10

Figure 3.11

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

Relationship between Output and Operation Status Register (Bit 7 to 11) at Triggered Gate

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

170

3.3.3 Questionable Data Status Register GroupThe contents of the questionable data status register is shown in Table 3.6.
Table 3.6 Questionable Data Status Register

Bit

Weight0

1

Contents
Overload (CH1)

1(Unused)2(Unused)3(Unused)

4

16

5
6

(Unused)64

78No external reference clock(Unused)

256

9
10

Overheat detection

Shows that the calibration is not completed.
(Unused)1024

Overload (CH2)

11(Unused)12(Unused)13(Unused)14(Unused)

15

Always 0

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

171

3.4

Warning Event Register GroupThe warning event register group is shown in Table 3.7. This register group configures three register sets:
one register set for each channel and one register set to summarize their sets.
Event register

Event enable register

&

15

15
14

&

14

:
:

:
:
&

2

2
1

&

1

&

0

0

Logical Sum

Status byte register (summary bit)

Figure 3.12

Warning Event Status Register Group Model

3.4.1 Event register
Each bit of the warning event register and the CH1 (CH2) warning event register is shown in Table 3.7
and Table 3.8.
The meaning of terms in Table 3.8 is as follows:
Channel mode parameters:
Means the frequency difference and frequency ratio. Waveform parameters:
Means the duty variable range, waveform polarity, amplitude range, ramp wave symmetry, and parametervariable waveform-specific parameter.
Basic parameters:
Means the frequency, period (cycle), phase, amplitude, DC offset, high level, low level, duty, pulse width,
and rising/falling time.
Other parameters: Means the channel mode, channel mode parameter, waveform, waveform parameter,
basic parameter, and parameters other than system unit.

The warning event register shows the status change of the equipment due to the external control and does
not show the status change of the equipment due to the panel operation.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

172

Table 3.7

Bit

WeightWarning Event Register

Contents

0(Unused)1(Unused)2(Unused)3(Unused)4(Unused)5(Unused)6(Unused)7(Unused)8(Unused)9512

CH1 warning event register summary

10

1024

CH2 warning event register summary

11(Unused)12(Unused)13(Unused)14(Unused)

15

Always 0

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

173

Table 3.8

CH1 (CH2) Warning Event Register

Bit

WeightContents

01

The waveform or waveform parameter is changed due to the change of channel
mode or channel mode parameter.

1

2

The basic parameter is changed due to the change of channel mode or channel
mode parameter.

2

4

The oscillation mode is changed due to the change of channel mode or channel
mode parameter.

3

8Other parameters are changed due to the change of channel mode or channel
mode parameter.

4

16

The channel mode or channel mode parameter is changed due to the change of
waveform or waveform parameter.

5

32

6

64

The basic parameter is changed due to the change of waveform or waveform
parameter.
Theoscillation mode is changed due to the change of waveform or waveform

7

128

parameter.
Otherparameters are changed due to the change of waveform or waveform
parameter.

8

256

Other basic parameters are changed due to the change of basic parameters(frequency, period (cycle), phase, amplitude, DC offset, high level, and low
level).

9

512

Other basic parameters are changed due to the change of basic parameters (dutyand pulse width).

10

1024

Other basic parameters are changed due to the change of basic parameters(rising time and falling time).

11

2048

Other parameters are changed due to the change of basic parameters.

12

4096

System unit is changed.

13
14
15

(Unused)
16384

Other parameters are changed.
Always 0

The event register is cleared upon reception of a query addressed to the event register or the *CLS command.

3.4.2 Event enable register

The event enable register is used to select bits in the event register to be summarized.
The event enable register is cleared when :STATus:PRESet command is received or when the power on isturned on while the power on status clear flag (set in *PSC) is set to TRUE.

3.5

Others

WF1947/WF1948 provide the error queue and error message queue.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)174

4. Error Message

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

175

If an error occurs when the external control is performed, the error number is stored in the error queue.
The error numbers and their corresponding messages and error contents are shown in Table 4.1. You canquery the error number and message using “:SYSTem:ERRor?”.
Table 4.1
Error
number
-102
-108
-109
-110
-111
-113
-120
-130
-140
-150
-160
-200

Syntax error
Parameter not allowed
Missing parameter
Command header error
Header separator error
Undefined header
Numeric data error
Suffix error
Character data error
String data error
Block data error
Execution error-211

Trigger ignored-220

Parameter error

Error Numbers, Messages, and their Contents

Message

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Contents (numbers in parentheses are error codes displayed in thescreen)The received string contains an incorrect syntax.
There are too many parameters.
One or more parameters are missing.
There is an error in the header.
There is an error in the keyword separator of the header.
The received string contains an invalid header.
There is an error in the numerical parameter.
There is an error in the suffix of the numerical parameter.
There is an error in the discrete parameter.
There is an error in the string parameter.
There is an error in the block parameter.
The command cannot be executed. The relevant error occurs in thefollowing cases:• When "*CLS" cannot be executed due to the status of equipment• When "*RST" cannot be executed due to the status of equipment• When other commands cannot be executed
GET (Group Execute Trigger), "*TRG", and other commands relating
to the trigger are ignored. The relevant error occurs in the following
cases:• When the control command is ignored due to the status of equipment
There is an error in the parameter. The relevant error occurs in thefollowing cases:• When there is an error in the prefix/unit of the numerical parameter• When the specified unit cannot be used due to the status ofequipment• When the name of arbitrary waveform exceeds 20 characters• When the name of arbitrary waveform contains the double quotation(")• When the number of data points for the arbitrary waveform isincorrect
When the number of used waveforms exceeds 128 or
total amount exceeds 512 KW

176

Errornumber-221

Settings conflict-222

Data out of range-225

Out of memory-290

Memory use error-291

Out of memory-310

System error-350

Queue overflow-410

Query INTERRUPTED-420

Query UNTERMINATED-440

Query UNTERMINATED
after indefinite response

Message

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Contents (numbers in parentheses are error codes displayed in thescreen)The correct syntax parameter is received but the command cannot be
executed due to the status of equipment.
The relevant error occurs in the following cases:•When the sweep function cannot be set in the log because theequipment is not a frequency sweep•When arbitrary waveform data in the array format is set in thearbitrary waveform edit memory•When the specification of array/control point format of the arbitrary
waveform data is incorrect• When the specified channel setting cannot be set in 2-channel
equivalence setting due to another channel's restriction (22039)•When the external modulation/addition input connector cannot be
used for the external modulation because it is used for the external
addition (23129)•When the external modulation/addition input connector cannot be
used for the external addition because it is used for the external
modulation (23130)
The correct syntax parameter is received but the command cannot be
executed due to the value out of range.
The relevant error occurs in the following cases:• When a value out of range is set for each register of the status
system• When 0 is set for the frequency ratio, N/M• When a value out of range is set for the user-defined unit, m/n• When the standard waveform of CH2 in the 1-channel machine iscopied to the memory• When a value out of the setting range is set (23045)
Memory required for execution is insufficient. The relevant error
occurs in the following cases:• When arbitrary waveform data cannot be saved due to insufficient
memoryCommand cannot be executed because an error occurs relating tomemory. The relevant error occurs in the following cases:• When empty memory is specified for the arbitrary waveform number• When the currently output or used arbitrary wave is deleted (32004)
Specified memory does not exist. The relevant error occurs in thefollowing cases:• When a value other than 0 to 128 is specified for the arbitrary wave
numberThis is a failure of this instrument. The relevant error occurs in thefollowing cases:• When the internal error occurs (24135, 24136, 35005)
An error occurs but the error is discarded because the error cannot beentered in the error queue.
A new response message entered the message queue, and thus theprevious response message was deleted.
The talker was specified, but the message queue has no response
message.
Query exists after "*IDN?" in the received string ("*IDN?" must be
the last query in the received string).

177

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)178

5. Specifications
5.1 Interface Functions········································································································ 180
5.2 Response to Interface Message ························································································· 180
5.3 Multi-Line Interface Message ···························································································· 181

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

179

5.1

Interface Functions
Table 5.1

Interface Functions of USB

Function

SubsetSource handshake

SH1

All send handshake functions provided

Acceptor handshake

AH1

All receive handshake functions provided

Talker

T6

Listener

L2

Basic talker functions and talker release by the MLA
provided
Basic listener functions provided

Service request

SR1

All service request functions provided

Remote/Local

RL1

All remote/local functions provided

Parallel poll

PP0

Parallel poll function not provided

Clear the device

DC1

All device clear functions provided

Device trigger

DT1

Device trigger function provided

Controller

C0

Controller function not provided

Table 5.2

5.2

Description

Interface Functions of GPIB

Function

SubsetDescription

Source handshake

SH1

All send handshake functions provided

Acceptor handshake

AH1

All receive handshake functions provided

Talker

T6

Listener

L4

Basic talker functions and talker release by the MLA
provided
Basic listener functions and listener release by the MTA

Service request

SR1

providedAll service request functions provided

Remote/Local

RL1

All remote/local functions provided

Parallel poll

PP0

Parallel poll function not provided

Clear the device

DC1

All device clear functions provided

Device trigger

DT1

All device trigger functions provided

Controller

C0

Controller function not provided

Response to Interface Message
Table 5.3
IFC

DCL and SDC

Response to Interface Message•Initialize the interface.
•Release the specified listener or talker.
•Clear the I/O buffer.
•Clear the error.
•Release the SRQ send and reset the error factor bitsin the status byte.
•Disable the SRQ send.

LLO•Disable the LOCAL key (software key) operation of the panel.

GTL•Turn to the Local state.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

180

5.3

Multi-Line Interface Message

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)181

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

182

6. Compatibility of External Control
6.1 Overview ··················································································································· 184
6.2 Older WF194x Series Commands Support List ····································································· 190
6.3 Descriptions of Individual Commands (Compatibility with older WF194x series) ··························· 198

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

183

6.1

Overview

This chapter describes the compatibility of WF series in the external control of WF1947/WF1948.

■Older product WF194x † 1series (hereinafter abbreviated as "older WF194x series.)
Supports the command system in type 1 format of WF1947/WF1948. (excluding a part)For details of partial restrictions, see "6.1.1 External Control Interface (Compatibility with older WF194x
series)."† 1) TARGET MODELS OF OLDER WF194X SERIES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
WF1943 / WF1944 / WF1945 / WF1946
WF1943A / WF1944A / WF1945A / WF1946A
WF1943B / WF1944B / WF1945B / WF1946B■WF1973/WF1974
It is compatible with the external control interface and commands of WF1973/WF1974.
According to the number of output channels provided, as for 1-channel machine, WF1973 can becontrolled as WF1947 and as for 2-channel machine, WF1974 can be controlled as WF1948.
The model name in the returned string by the device information query (*IDN?) is changed.
It can be used as WF1947 or WF1948.
The corresponding commands are not supported because the following functions are not provided with
WF1947/WF1948:[Unsupported commands]•Sequence function related commands•Commands relating to PWF parametrically-variable waveform setting•Multi-I/O related commands

For detailed functions of equipment, see the separate manual "WF1947/WF1948
Instruction Manual (Operations)."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1846.1.1 External Control Interface (Compatibility with older WF194x series)[GPIB]In the GPIB setting on the side of controller such as PC, be sure to perform the output setting of
EOI for the command send. If output setting of EOI is not performed, no command is executed.
Other connection specification is not changed.
[USB]
As for the USB connection specification with the external control equipment, older WF194x series used theUSB488 connection specification but the WF1947/WF1948 changes to the USB-TMC specification.
USB driver software in the PC used for the external control must be changed.
About USB ID of USB-TMC
The USB ID is represented in the following format:
USB0::[Vendor number]::[Product number]::[Serial number]::INSTR
Vendor number:

Fixed to 3402 (0x0D4A)

Product number:

13 (0x000D)/WF1947,

Serial number:

A unique number (serial number) has been set for each product.

14 (0x000E)/WF1948

For how to install the driver software of the USB-TMC specification, see "1. Preparations before Use."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

185

[Difference of USB programming]
The following table shows the comparison for the primary programming APIs:
USB-TMC can use the VISA programming interface.
VISA APIs equivalent to APIs used for USB488 are provided.
USB-TMCVISA programming

USB488
UsbOpenDevice( )viOpen( )UsbDevClear( )viClear( )UsbEnableRemote( )viGpibControlREN( )UsbSendTextData( )viWrite( )UsbRecieveTextData( )viRead( )UsbCloseDevice( )viClose( )From the USB488, the specification method of the recognition ID for the individual device is changed.
From the specification of address number, the following VISA resource name format is used:[Example of older WF194x series]
2[Example of WF1947: VISA resource nameformat]USB0:: 0x0D4A:: 0x000D::[Serial number]::INSTR

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1866.1.2 General Differences in Commands (Compatibility with older WF194x
series)

It is not recommended to mix the commands of older WF194x series with the co mmands of
WF1947/WF1948 because each concept of channel setting differs. Additional information on thecommand to be replaced is described in the detailed description for each command.

WF1947/WF1948 do not support the commands in the type 2 format of older WF194x series.
Replace with the WF1947/WF1948 commands that support
the older WF194x series commands.

[Difference of channel synchronization]Older WF194x series can perform the 2-channel synchronization in the trigger operation, but
the WF1947/WF1948 perform the pseudo channel synchronization.
[Status System]
Contents of each operation event status register differs.
Contents of each overload event status register differs.
Contents of each warning event status register differs.
If the program is written in the system to reference the status bit in the register,change to reference the corresponding bit assigned to each register.
For details, see "3. Status System."[Parameter specification]
When you specify the command parameters, be sure to insert the space (code: 32) between the commandand the parameter.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

187

6.1.3 Commands Subject to Restrictions (Compatibility with older WF194x
series)Some commands are restricted when using older WF194x series command.
The restrictions are described below. The command notation is shown in the type 1 command.
For details of each command, see "6.3 Descriptions of Individual Commands."[Commands recognized as WF1947/WF1948 commands]
When you replace the commands in the type 2 format of older WF194x series with the commands of
WF1947/WF1948, if the behavior differs, replace them with the compatible commands in type 1 forma tof older WF194x series. For support status, see the compatibility support items in "6.2

Older WF194x

Series Commands Support List."[Commands partially restricted to their operations](ACP)

As the copy of standard waveform, rising sawtooth wave, and falling sawtooth wave, the triangle

wave with the symmetry value set at that time is copied.
(ARB/ARW)
Arbitrary waveform transfer supports only the ASCII mode.
When you transfer data with 1024 or more bytes, ARB/ARW must be prepended to the head.
(ORG) Only the automatic range is supported as the output range setting.
(MRK) Setting of mark wave number

Only the setting of auto burst and trigger burst is supported.

(TRE) Only the sweep and burst mode are supported in the status of external trigger input connector for
remote.
(TRG) The gate oscillation mode is not supported.
(RST) Output is made off at the command execution.
(BRO/MDO/SWO)
If the setting is common to both channels, setting the command to change the frequency and amplitudechanges to the setting common to both channels.
(SFC) The sweep function square wave and sine wave sweep are set/queried using the different
implementation method.
[Commands whose parameter specification method must be changed](DDV) Half deviation of pulse width modulation must be set.
(ODV) Half deviation of DC offset must be set.
(PDV) The phase deviation setting must be set up to 180.000 deg.
(STO) Memory number must be set/queried within 1 to 10.
(RCL) Memory number must be set/queried within 1 to 10.
(MCO) Memory number must be set/queried within 1 to 10.
(MDL) Memory number must be set/queried within 1 to 10.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

188

[Commands whose response data at query must be changed](?ALT) The fixed string <Edit Memory> is returned as the name corresponding to the arbitrary waveform memory
number 0.
(?ERR) Returns the corresponding error message of WF1947/WF1948.
(?MCO) The set memory comments are not recorded.
(?IDT) ID read Returns the WF1947/WF1948 ID.
[Commands that must be replaced with WF1947/WF1948 commands](?VSC/VSE/?VC1/?VC2/VE1/VE2) Setting/query of the overload status register.
(SYT) Setting/query of the modulated oscillation mode FSK, PSK, and AMSC in the SYNCOUT output selection.
[Commands not functioned](WAI) WAI target command does not exist.
(OPC) OPC target command does not exist.
(HLE) Not functioned because the sweep pose input connector does not exist.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

189

6.2

Older WF194x Series Commands Support List

The following table is the commands list of previous WF194x series.

Each item of the commands list shows the followings:[function] Command function[Type 1] Setting/query command of previous WF194x series type 1 1[Type 2] Setting/inquiry command of previous WF194x series type 2
Attach ? to the end of query/command.
lower-case characters can be omitted.
[Compatibility support]
 : Compatibility is supported.
 : Commands in type 2 format are handled as WF1947/WF1948 commands.
The action may be different from previous F194x series, orthe commands may not be accepted.
If the action differs, replace it with the type 1 command.
⚫ : There are restrictions on some actions.
 : The method to specify the parameter is changed.
◼ : Response data at query must be changed.
 : It is necessary to replace with the command of WF1947/WF1948.
 : Does not work, though no command error occurs.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

190

Function

Type 1

Type 2 (For reference)

Compatibility
supportOutput On/Off selection

SIG/?SIG:OUTPut:STATe

Channel mode selection †1

CMO/?CMO:CHANnel:MODE

Channel selection †1

CHA/?CHA:CHANnel

Simultaneous setting †1

CPL/?CPL:INSTrument:COUPle

Oscillation mode selection

OMO/?OMO:SOURce:MODE

FRQ/?FRQ:FREQuency

Measurement unit selection

FRU/?FRU:FREQuency:UNIT

User-defined unit

UFU/?UFU:FREQuency:USER

AMV/?AMV:VOLTageMeasurement unit selection

AMU/?AMU:VOLTage:UNIT

User-defined unit

UAU/?UAU:VOLTage:USER

OFS/?OFS:VOLTage:OFFSet

Unit selection †3

OFU/?OFU:VOLTage:OFFSet:UNIT

User-defined unit

UOU/?UOU:VOLTage:OFFSet:USER

PHS/?PHS:PHASe

Measurement unit selection

PHU/?PHU:PHASe:UNIT

User-defined unit

UHU/?UHU:PHASe:USER

DTY/?DTY:PULSe:DCYCle



Measurement unit selection

DTU/?DTU:PULSe:DCYCLe:UNIT

User-defined unit

UDU/?UDU:PULSe:DCYCLe:USER



PUW/?PUW:PULSe:WIDTh

PWU/?PWU:PULSe:WIDTh:UNIT

PRD/?PRD:PULSe:PERiod

Unit selection †2

PRU/?PRU:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT

User-defined unit

UPU/?UPU:PULSe:PERiod:USER

HIV/?HIV:VOLTage:HIGH

HVU/?HVU:VOLTage:HIGH:UNIT

LOV/?LOV:VOLTage:LOW

LVU/?LVU:VOLTage:LOW:UNIT



ENTRY
Frequency

Amplitude

DC Offset

Phase

Duty

Pulse width
Unit selection †2
PeriodHigh level
Unit selection †3
Low level
Unit selection †3† 1: WF1948 only
† 2: The unit selections for pulse width and cycle are set as the same value.
† 3: The unit selections for DC offset, high level and low level are set as the same value.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

191

Function

Type 1

Type 2 (For reference)

Compatibility
supportFrequency difference at 2TONE †1

FDI/?FDI:CHANnel:DELTa

Frequency ratio at RATIO †1

FRA/?FRA:CHANnel:RATio

Waveform Selection

FNC/?FNC:FUNCtion:SHAPe

Burst type selection

BTY/?BTY:BM:TYPE

Trigger/gate source selection

TRS/?TRS:BM:SOURceInternal trigger cycle

BIR/?BIR:BM:INTernal:RATE

Polarity of trigger signal selection

BES/?BES:BM:SLOPe

CH 2 external trigger selection †1

BEC/?BEC:BM:EXTernal:CHANnel

Trigger delay

TRD/?TRD:BM:DELayMark wave number

MRK/?MRK:BM:MARKSpace wave number

SPC/?SPC:BM:SPACe

Stop level

BSV/?BSV:BM:SLEVelselection

BSS/?BSS:BM:SLEVel:STATe

BRO/?BRO:BM:OCOMmon⚫

SYT/?SYT:OUTPut:SYNC:TYPE⚫

Sweep type selection

STY/?STY:SWEep:TYPE



Sweep trigger source selection (Single/gated sweep)
Internal trigger cycle (Single /gatedsweep)
Polarity of trigger signal selection(Single /gated sweep)
CH2 external trigger selection (Single/gated sweep) †1

SGS/?SGS:SWEep:SOURce

SIR/?SIR:SWEep:INTernal:RATESES/?SES:SWEep:SLOPe

SEC/?SEC:SWEep:EXTernal:CHANnel

Selects sweep mode

SMO/?SMO:SWEep:MODE

Select Sweep function

SSC/?SSC:SWEep:SPACing

SFC/?SFC:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion⚫

Sweep time

STM/?STM:SWEep:TIME

Stop level (gated sweep)

SLV/?SLV:SWEep:SLEVel

Selection (gated sweep)

SLS/?SLS:SWEep:SLEVel:STATeStart value of frequency sweep

STF/?STF:FREQuency:STARt

SPF/?SPF:FREQuency:STOP

Burst menu

Trigger operation
Chanel-independent/common selection†1
Output selection of SYNC OUT

Sweep menu

Stop value† 1: WF1948 only

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

192

Function

Type 1

Type 2 (For reference)

CompatibilitysupportCenter value

CTF/?CTF:FREQuency:CENTer

Span value

SNF/?SNF:FREQuency:SPAN



marker value

MKF/?MKF:FREQuency:MARKerStart status/stop status

FSS/-:FREQuency:STATe

STA/?STA:VOLTage:STARt

Stop value

SPA/?SPA:VOLTage:STOP



Center value

CTA/?CTA:VOLTage:CENTer

Span value

SNA/?SNA:VOLTage:SPAN



marker value

MKA/?MKA:VOLTage:MARKerStart status/stop status

ASS/-:VOLTage:STATe

STE/?STE:VOLTage:OFFSet:STARt

Stop value

SPE/?SPE:VOLTage:OFFSet:STOP



Center value

CTE/?CTE:VOLTage:OFFSet:CENTer

Span value

SNE/?SNE:VOLTage:OFFSet:SPAN



marker value

MKE/?MKE:VOLTage:OFFSet:MARKerStart status/stop statusOSS/-:VOLTage:OFFSet:STATe

STP/?STP:PHASe:STARt

Stop value

SPP/?SPP:PHASe:STOP



Center value

CTP/?CTP:PHASe:CENTer

Span value

SNP/?SNP:PHASe:SPAN



marker value

MKP/?MKP:PHASe:MARKerStart status/stop status

PSS/-:PHASe:STATe

STU/?STU:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt

Stop value

SPU/?SPU:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP



Center value

CTU/?CTU:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer

Span value

SNU/?SNU:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN



marker value

MKU/?MKU:PULSe:DCYCle:MARKerStart status/stop status

USS/-:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe

SWO/?SWO:SWEep:OCOMmon⚫

Start value of oscillation sweep

Start value of DC offset sweep

Start value of phase sweep

Start value of duty sweep

Selection common to triggers(Single/gated sweep) †1† 1: WF1948 only

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

193

Function
Wait until single/gated sweep
operation completes

Type 1

Type 2 (For reference)

Compatibilitysupport

WAI/-

*WAI



Modulation type selection

MTY/?MTY:MODulation:TYPE



Deviation of frequency modulation

FDV/?FDV:FM:DEViation

modulation frequency

FFQ/?FFQ:FM:INTernal:FREQuency

Modulation waveform selection

FFC/?FFC:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion



Deviation of phase modulation

PDV/?PDV:PM:DEViation

modulation frequency

PFQ/?PFQ:PM:INTernal:FREQuency

Modulation waveform selection

PFC/?PFC:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion



ADV/?ADV:AM:DEPTh

AFQ/?AFQ:AM:INTernal:FREQuency

Modulation waveform selection

AFC/?AFC:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion



Deviation of DC offset modulation

ODV/?ODV:OM:DEViation

modulation frequency

OFQ/?OFQ:OM:INTernal:FREQuency

Modulation waveform selection

OFC/?OFC:OM:INTernal:FUNCtion



Deviation of pulse width modulation

DDV/?DDV:PWM:DEViation

modulation frequency

DFQ/?DFQ:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency

Modulation waveform selection

DFC/?DFC:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion

Modulation operation
Chanel-independent/common selection
Selectionof start/stop, etc. (Burst,†1
sweep, modulation)

MDO/?MDO:MODulation:OCOMmon⚫

TRG/?TRG:TRIGger:SOURce⚫

AFN/?AFN:FUNCtion:USER



Data writing

ARB/-:DATA:DAC⚫

Data writing

ARW/-:DATA:DAC:WORD⚫

Name query

Modulation menu

Modulation degree of amplitude
modulation
modulation frequency

Arbitrary waveform menu
Arbitrary waveform selection-/?ALT:DATA:CATalog◼

Specification of transfer starting
address

STT/?STT:DATA:DAC:ADDRess

Selection of data transfer order

AFM/?AFM:FORMat:BORDer

Copy operation

ACP/-:DATA:COPY

⚫

clear

ACL/-

:DATA:CLEarAll clear

AAC/-:DATA:CLEar:ALL† 1: WF1948 only

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

194

Function

Type 1

Type 2 (For reference)

CompatibilitysupportData size selection

APT/?APT:DATA:ATTRibute:POINtsquery of arithmetic average of data-/?AAP:DATA:ATTRibute:MEAN

query of arithmetic average of data-/?AAV:DATA:ATTRibute:AVERage

query of p-p value of data-/?APP:DATA:ATTRibute:PTPeak

Output range selection

ORG/?ORG:OUTPut:RANGe

Setting initialization (Clear an event
status register)

PST/-:SYSTem:PRESet(An event status register is notcleared)

RST/-

*RST

⚫

LOAD

OLD/?OLD:OUTPut:LOAD



OLS/?OLS:OUTPut:LOAD:STATe

Copy the setting between the channels
†1

CDC/-

:CHANnel:DATA:COPY

External AM

AMM/?AMM:EXTernal:AM:STATe

External addition

EAS/?EAS:EXTernal:ADD:STATe

Executes the phase synchronization

SYN/-:OUTPut:PSYNc



Selection of output status at power-on

POS/?POS:SYSTem:PON



Duty variable timing

DTT/?DTT[SOURce]:PULSe:TYPE⚫

Saving the setting

STO/-

*SAV



Recalling settings

RCL/-

*RCL



Clears the setting memory

MDL/-:MEMory:STATe:DELete

Comment on setting memory

MCO/?MCO:MEMory:STATe:COMMent◼

Clearing event status registers andrelated queues
Flag of clearing a status register at
power-on

CLS/-

*CLS



PSC/?PSC*PSC



Reading status bytes-/?STS*STBService request enable registerMSK/?MSK*SRE

System Menus

Function On/Off selection

Memory menu

Status byte

† 1: WF1948 only

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

195

Function
Reading the standard event status
register
Enable register
Query of operation event status
register
Enable register
Query of CH 1 operation event status
register
Enable register

Type 1*ESRESE/?ESE*ESE-/?OSC:STATus:OPERation:CONDition



OSE/?OSE:STATus:OPERation:ENABle

-/?OC1:STATus:OPERation:CH1:CONDition

OE1/?OE1:STATus:OPERation:CH1:ENABle

-/?OC2:STATus:OPERation:CH2:CONDition

OE2/?OE2:STATus:OPERation:CH2:ENABle

-/?VSC:STATus:OVERload:CONDition



VSE/?VSE:STATus:OVERload:ENABle

-/?VC1:STATus:OVERload:CH1:CONDition

VE1/?VE1:STATus:OVERload:CH1:ENABle



Query of over load event status
register
Enable register
Query of CH 1 over load event status
register
Enable register

Compatibilitysupport-/?ESR

Query of CH 2 operation event status
register †1
Enable register †1Type 2 (For reference)

Query of CH 2 over load event status
register †1
Enable register †1-/?VC2:STATus:OVERload:CH2:CONDition



VE2/?VE2:STATus:OVERload:CH2:ENABle



Query of warning event status register-/?WSC:STATus:WARNing:CONDition

WSE/?WSE:STATus:WARNing:ENABle

-/?WC1:STATus:WARNing:CH1:CONDition

WE1/?WE1:STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle

-/?WC2:STATus:WARNing:CH2:CONDition

WE2/?WE2:STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle

Function equivalent to a group execute
trigger
Selection of external trigger input
connecter status
Selection of sweep pause input
connecter status
Know completion of single
sweep/gated sweep
Query of a result of self diagnosis at
power-on

GET/-

*TRG



TRE/?TRE:TRIGger:EIN:STATe⚫

HLE/?HLE:TRIGger:PIN:STATe

OPC/?OPC*OPC

-/?TST*TST

Queries errors-/?ERR:SYSTem:ERRor◼

Selection of header On/Off

HDR/?HDR

None

Version query-/?VER:SYSTem:VERSion

Load the ID-/?IDT*IDN◼

Enable register
Query of CH 1 warning event status
register
Enable register
Query of CH 2 warning event status
register †1
Enable register †1

GPIB specific function† 1: WF1948 only

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

1966.2.1 Notes on Operations with External Control (Compatibility with older
WF194x series)•Output on/off
Equipment with 2-channel oscillation output (for WF1948)
For an output On/Off operation by the external control, a channel is selected beforehand.
•Setting by user-defined unit
For settings by user-defined unit through the external control, the dedicated commands for frequency,
amplitude, DC offset, phase, duty and cycle set a name formula, factor and offset collectively.
•Manual trigger, sweep/modulation operation
Start/stop operations of trigger, sweep/modulation by the external control is executed by the TRG(:TRIG:SOUR) command. In addition, the GET (*TRG) command executes some similar operations.
•Sweep setting
A start value/stop value/center value/span value/marker value/start status/stop statu s by the external
control is set using the dedicated command for each sweep type.
•Difference of "ARB" and "ARW" arbitrary waveform writing commands
The "ARB" command is preserved to ensure compatibility with
WF1943/WF1944/WF1945/WF1946/WF1943A/WF1944 A/WF1945 A/WF1946 A.
A waveform data value specified with parameter is converted to a twice number of the value so that it
is correct waveform data, and then stored in the waveform memory of WF1947/WF1948.
The "ARW" command stores the waveform data value specified with parameter in the waveform
memory of WF1947/WF1948, as value itself.
•Relation between arbitrary waveform memory and output D/A
Number of
Number ofmemory bits
D/A bits
WF1947 / WF1948
16
16
WF1973 / WF1974
16
14
WF1943B / WF1944B
16
14
WF1945B / WF1946B
16
16
The values for the lower-level 2 bit of memory of WF1945B/WF1946B are not reflected to the output.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

197

6.3

Descriptions of Individual Commands (Compatibility witholder WF194x series)

This section describes the details of external control commands. The commands for Type 1 are aligned inalphabetical order. The lower-case part of Type 2 can be omitted. (Type 2 is not supported.)
The meanings of the symbols used in the description are shown below:[]: This parenthesis can be omitted{}: Select either of choices in this parenthesis: Specify the value or the character string in this parenthesis

The detailed description explains the following content:

Command name (Command in Type 1 format)

Description
Describes the action of the command.
Parameters
Describes the command specified by parameters.
† Be sure to enter a space character (code: 32)
between the command and the parameter.
Response format
Describes the response format of the query command.
Type 2 (For reference)
WF1947/WF1948 do not support the commands in the type 2 format of older WF194x
series, but this is described as a reference for command replacement.
Settings: Describes the specification with commands in Type 2 format.
Query: Describes the specification with commands in Type 2 format.

Compatibility Information
Describes the cautions for use of the commands compatible with the old WF194x series.
For command with no special caution, only compatibility support is described.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

198

6.3.1 AAC
Description
Clears all arbitrary waveforms.
Parameters
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings::DATA:CLEar:ALL
Query:
None
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
Clears all arbitrary waveform data from No. 0 to No. 128 of WF1947/WF1948 arbitrary
waveform memory.

6.3.2 ?AAP
Description
Inquires the arithmetic average of all arbitrary waveform data selected at that time in theunit that indicates the whole available range of waveform data value for setting as 1.
After the arithmetic average is calculated, it rounded up to four decimal point digits.
Response format-0.5000+0.5000
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :DATA:ATTRibute:MEAN?
Response example
AAP 0.0000
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
If an arbitrary waveform data of WF1947/WF1948 in the control point form is stored in
the memory, the command causes an execution error. Only data in array format aresupported.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

199

6.3.3 ?AAV
Description
Inquires the arithmetic average of all arbitrary waveform data selected at that time in theunit of LSB that number of bits of memory is considered as 15.
The command to make a setting value compatible with
WF1943/44/45/46/43A/44A/45A/46A. This command returns 1/2 of the average value inthe memory.
Usually, use the "?AAP" command.
Response format-16384.0+16383.0
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings:
Query:

None:DATA:ATTRibute:AVERage?

Response example
AAV 0.0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
If an arbitrary waveform data of WF1947/WF1948 in the control point form is stored in
the memory, the command causes an execution error. Only data in array format aresupported.

6.3.4 ACL
Description
Clears arbitrary waveforms with the specified name.
If a name is omitted, then clears the arbitrary waveforms selected at that time.
Parameters
Name of the arbitrary waveform to be cleared (character string data, up to eightcharacters, can be omitted)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :DATA:CLEar [<arb name>]
Query: None
Setting example
Clears the arbitrary waveform with name of "ARB_00".
Type 1: ACL“ARB_00”
Type 2 (For reference):DATA:CLE“ARB_00”
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2006.3.5 ACP
Description
Copies an arbitrary waveform data with the specified name to another arbitrary
waveform.
A name of the destination arbitrary waveform can be omitted. If omitted, it is copied to
the waveform that is selected at that time.
Parameters Name of the destination arbitrary waveform (character string data, up to eightcharacters, can be omitted)
 Name of the source waveform memory (character string data, up to 8 characters) .
In addition to an arbitrary waveform, the standard waveform is also available.
The names are shown in the following table:•SINusoid (sine wave)•TRIangle (triangular wave)•SQUare (rectangular wave)
A name can be specified only for the above uppercase section, but is should be specified
with uppercase only.
An arbitrary waveform that has the same name with the standard waveform (even inabbreviated format) cannot be used as a source.
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :DATA:COPY [<arb name>],<source arb name>Query: None
Setting example
Copies a triangular wave to the arbitrary waveform with the name of “ARB_00”.
Type 1: ACP “ARB_00”,“TRI”
Type 2 (For reference):DATA:COPY “ARB_00”,“TRI”
Compatibility Information
Parameters of PRAMp (riding sawtooth wave) and NRAMp (falling sawtooth wave) do
not cause a command error. However, the triangular wave based on the symmetry settingat that time is copied.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

201

6.3.6 ADV/?ADV
Description
Sets/inquires the modulation degree of amplitude.
Parameters
Modulation degree of amplitude modulation
0.0 (0%) 100.0 (100%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:AM:DEPTh {<depth in percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:AM:DEPTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the modulation degree of amplitude modulation as 10%.
Type 1: ADV 10
Type 2 (For reference):AM:DEPT 10
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.7 AFC/?AFC
Description
Selects/inquires the modulation waveform of amplitude modulation.
Parameters
Modulation waveform selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SINusoid (sine wave)
1: TRIangle (triangular wave)
2: SQUare (rectangular wave)
3: PRAMp(Rising sawtooth wave)
4: NRAMp(Falling sawtooth wave)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|PRAMp|NRAMp}
Query: [:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Setting example
Changes a modulation waveform of amplitude modulation into a square wave.
Type 1: AFC 2
Type 2 (For reference):AM:INT:FUNC SQU
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2026.3.8 AFM/?AFM
Description
Selects/inquires the order of transferred bytes of an arbitrary waveform data.
Specifies whether to exchange upper/lower bytes when an arbitrary waveform data is
written with binary data.
Selected so that bytes are not exchanged when the PST (:SYSTem:PRESet) or RST(*RST) command is executed at the time of power-on.
Parameters
Order of transferred bytes (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: NORMal (Not exchanged, transferred in the order of upper byte → lower byte)
1: SWAPped (Exchanged, transferred in the order of lower byte → upper byte)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :FORMat:BORDer
Query: :FORMat:BORDer?

{NORMal|SWAPped}

Setting example
Set so that arbitrary waveform data are written in the order from the upper byte to thelower byte.
Type 1: AFM 0
Type 2 (For reference):FORM:BORD NORM
Compatibility Information
Does not have impacts on the operation command for arbitrary waveform of
WF1947/WF1948.
This is effective only under control by the command to write arbitrary waveforms of theold WF194x series.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2036.3.9 AFN/?AFN
Description
Selects/inquires the arbitrary waveform.
Parameters
Any one of "number of arbitrary waveform +', '+ name of arbitrary waveform", or"number of arbitrary waveform", or "', '+ name of arbitrary waveform".
A name of arbitrary waveform is up to eight characters of character string data, andspace at the head is acceptable.
0 to 11 can be set as the number of arbitrary waveform for arbitrary waveform data sizeof 8KW, 0 to 5 can be set for 16KW, 0 to 2 for 32KW, and 0 for 64KW.
Response format"number of arbitrary waveform +', '+ name of arbitrary waveform"
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FUNCtion:USER {<arb number>}, {<arb name>}or[:SOURce]:FUNCtion:USER {<arb number>}or[:SOURce]:FUNCtion:USER, {<arb name>}
Query: [:SOURce]:FUNCtion:USER?
Setting example
Selects the arbitrary waveform with name of "ARB_03".
Type 1: AFN,“ARB_03”
Type 2 (For reference):FUNC:USER,“ARB_03”
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2046.3.10 AFQ/?AFQ
Description
Sets/inquires the modulation frequency of amplitude.
Parametersmodulation frequency : 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) 1000000 (1MHz)
Resolution: 5 digits for 1Hz or higher, 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) for less than 1Hz
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce] :AM:INTernal:FREQuency {frequency|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce] :AM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the modulation frequency of amplitude modulation as 100Hz.
Type 1: AFQ 100
Type 2 (For reference):AM:INT:FREQ 100
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.(500Hz → 1MHz)6.3.11 ?ALT
Description
Inquires names of all arbitrary waveforms.
Response format
Character string data (Responded by separating names with comma)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :DATA:CATalog?
Response example
ALT “ARB_00 ”,“ARB_01 ”,....,“ARB_11 ”Compatibility Information
The fixed string <Edit Memory> is returned as the name corresponding to the arbitrary
waveform memory number 0.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2056.3.12 AMM/?AMM
Description
Selects/inquires the external AM.
Parameters
Status selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Turn off the external AM)
1: ON (Turn on the external AM)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce] :EXTerna1:AM:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce] :EXTerna1:AM:STATe?
Setting example
Turns on the external AM.
Type 1: AMM 1
Type 2 (For reference):EXT:AM:STAT ON
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.13 AMU/?AMU
Description
Selects/inquires the amplitude unit.
Parameters
Amplitude unit selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0: VPP (Vp-p)
1: VRMS (Vrms)
2: DBV (dBV)
3: DBM (dBm)
4: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to "Vpp".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:UNIT{VPP|VRMS|DBV|DBM|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:UNIT?
Setting example
Set the unit of amplitude width as dBV.
Type 1: AMU 2
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:UNIT DBV
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.14 AMV/?AMVWF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)206

Description
Sets/inquires the amplitude. The setting for amplitude sweep is ignored. For query toamplitude sweep/modulation, the instantaneous value of the query is returned.
In case that the actual amplitude is 0, "-INF" is returned as a response when dBV/dBm isselected as the amplitude unit for the "AMU" command. Or, when LOG is used as theamplitude user-defined unit for the "UAU" command, "-INF" or "+INF" is returned as a
response.
To set the actual amplitude as 0, specify substantially small/large value or"-INF"/"+INF".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the amplitude as 10Vp-p/open.
It is assumed that the amplitude unit is Vp-p, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: AMV 10
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT 10
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.15 ?APP
Description
Inquires the difference between the maximum and minimum values (peak-to-peak (p-p)
value) of waveform data in one arbitrary waveform.
It is indicated as the ratio to the p-p value = 65535 (p-p value of min./max. values ofavailable waveform data). After the ratio is calculated, it rounded up to four decimal
point digits.
Response format
0.00001.0000
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :DATA:ATTRibute:PTPeak?
Response example
AAP 1.0000
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
If an arbitrary waveform data of WF1947/WF1948 in the control point form is stored in
the memory, the command causes an execution error. Only data in array format aresupported.

6.3.16 APT/?APTDescription
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

207

Selects/inquires the size of an arbitrary waveform data.
Parameters
Arbitrary waveform data size (0 to 3)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0
: 8KW
1
: 16KW2: 32KW3: 64KW
When setting Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"8KW".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :DATA:ATTRibute:POINts {8KW|16KW|32KW|64KW|DEFault}
Query: :DATA:ATTRibute:POINts?
Setting example
Set the size of arbitrary waveform data as 8KW.
Type 1: APT 0
Type 2 (For reference):DATA:ATTR:POIN 8KW
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2086.3.17 ARB
Description
Names the waveform memory that is selected at that time to transfer the data.
If a name is omitted, the waveform data is transferred without changing the namealready exists.
In case of name only, rename the waveform memory that is selected at that time.
The waveform data can be transferred from the middle of the waveform memory byusing STT command.
Parameters
Name of waveform memory
Up to character string data of 8 characters. A name can be omitted.
However, cannot be omitted, if the name is changed.
Transferred data (ASCII data list, waveform data:-16384 to +16383)
ASCII data list : Waveform data[, waveform data[, waveform data...]]
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :DATA:DAC {<arb name>|[<arb name>]}Query: None
Setting example
Name as “ARB_01”, and then write data with ASCII data list.
Type 1: ARB “ARB_01”,237,1779,-986,...
Type 2 (For reference):DATA:DAC “ARB_01”, 237, 1779, -986,...
Note
In case of ASCII data list, an error occurs if number of characters transferred at the sametime exceeds 1024 bytes. Insert delimiters in appropriate interval to transfer. Lines otherthan the final line must be ended with "," (comma).
+16383 is set for waveform data of +16384 or higher, and -16385 is set for -16384 or
lower.
The waveform data is stored internally as a double value.
Compatibility Information
Binary data transmission is not supported.
Transfer data that binary data is converted into ASCII data list.
In addition, to transfer a data list exceeding 1024 bytes,
transfer the subsequent waveform data with the identical waveform memory nameincluding the command character string.
<Example>[1st]
ARB “ARB_01”,123,456,789,…………….123,456,789,[2nd]
ARB “ARB_01” ,987,654,321,…………….987,654,321,:[Final ]The end of data must be data without "," (comma).
ARB “ARB_01” ,-123,-456,-789,…………….-123,-456,-789

6.3.18 ARW

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)209

Description
Names the waveform memory that is selected at that time to transfer the data.
If a name is omitted, the waveform data is transferred without changing the namealready exists.
In case of name only, rename the waveform memory that is selected at that time.
The waveform data can be transferred from the middle of the waveform memory byusing "STT" command.
The data changes by the number transferred from the starting address with this command.
The specified number of bits are top aligned. If the number of memory bits is larger,align 0 to the subordinated bit. If the specified number of bits is larger, the subordinated
bit of transferred data is omitted.
Parameters(1) Name of waveform memory
Up to character string data of 8 characters. A name can be omitted.
However, cannot be omitted, if the name is changed.
(2) Specify the number of transferred data bits
16bit fixed(3) Transferred data
(ASCII data list, waveform data is transferred, waveform data:-32768 to +32767)
ASCII data list: Waveform data[, waveform data[, waveform data...]]
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :DATA:DAC:WORD {<arb name>|[<arb name>],[<bit length>]}Query: None
Setting example
Name as “ARB_01”, and then write data with ASCII data list.
Type 1: ARW “ARB_01”,,123,245,-456,...
Type 2 (For reference):DATA:DAC:WORD “ARB_01”, , 123, 245, -456,...
Note
In case of ASCII data list, an error occurs if number of characters transferred at the sametime exceeds 1024 bytes. Therefore, the data can be transferred to multiple records thatend with "," by delimiting with delimiter.
Compatibility Information
Binary data transmission is not supported.
Transfer data that binary data is converted into ASCII data list.
In addition, to transfer a data list exceeding 1024 bytes,
transfer the subsequent waveform data with the identical waveform memory nameincluding the command character string.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

210

<Example>[1st]
ARW “ARB_01”,123,456,789,…………….123,456,789,[2nd]
ARW “ARB_01” ,987,654,321,…………….987,654,321,:[Final ]The end of data must be data without "," (comma).
ARW “ARB_01” ,-123,-456,-789,…………….-123,-456,-789

6.3.19 ASS
Description
Sets the output as the start value/stop value in the amplitude sweep.
Parameters
Start value/stop value (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: STOP (Sets the output as the stop value)
1: STARt (Sets the output as the starting value)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STATe {STARt|
STOP}
Query: None
Setting example
Sets the output as the stop value in the amplitude sweep.
Type 1: ASS 0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:STAT STOP
Compatibility support
Compatibility support

6.3.20 BEC/?BEC (WF1948)
Description
Selects/inquires CH 2 external trigger.
Parameters
Channel number (1 to 2)
Type 1, 2
1: Use the TRIG/SWEEP IN of CH 1 as the trigger source of CH 2
2: Use the TRIG/SWEEP IN of CH 2 as the trigger source of CH 2
When setting :Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to "2".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:EXTernal:CHANnel {<channel>|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:EXTernal:CHANnel?
Setting example
Use the TRIG/SWEEP IN of CH 1 as the trigger source of CH 2.
Type 1: BEC 1
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)211

Type 2 (For reference):BM:EXT:CHAN 1
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.21 BES/?BES
Description
Selects/queries the trigger signal polarity.
Parameters
Trigger signal polarity selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0: POSitive (Trigger oscillation:Trigger at the rising, Gate oscillation: Oscillate at
the high level)1: NEGative (Trigger oscillation:Trigger at the falling, Gate oscillation: Oscillate
at the low level)
When setting :Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"NEgative".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:SLOPe?
Setting example
In case of trigger oscillation, trigger at the falling.
Type 1: BES 1
Type 2 (For reference):BM:SLOP NEG
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2126.3.22 BIR/?BIR
Description
Sets/inquires the internal trigger cycle in burst mode.
Parameters
Internal trigger cycle setting
1E-06 (1µs) to 1000 (1000.0s), Resolution: 4 digits for 1ms or higher, 1E-06 (1µs) forless than 1ms
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:INTernal:RATE {<rate>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:INTernal:RATE? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the internal trigger cycle as 1ms.
Type 1: BIR 1E-03
Type 2 (For reference):BM:INT:RATE 1E-03
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x. (100s → 1000s)

6.3.23 BRO/?BRO (WF1948)
Description
Selects/inquires whether to operate the trigger from the panel key and the external
control separately for each channel, or common to both channels.
Parameters
Operation status selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Independent for each channel)
1: ON (Common to both channels)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:OCOMmon {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:OCOMmon?
Setting example
Set the trigger operation as common to both channels.
Type 1: BRO 1
Type 2 (For reference):BM:OCOM ON
Compatibility Information
In case of common channel setting (1 or ON), when setting the command to change
frequency or amplitude, it is set as common to both channels.
If you set different frequency or amplitude for each channel, set as 0 or OFF once, andthen set the frequency and/or amplitude.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

213

6.3.24 BSS/?BSS
Description
Selects/inquires the stop level.
Parameters
Stop level selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Stop level OFF)1
: ON (Stop level ON)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:SLEVel:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:SLEVel:STATe?
Setting example
Select the stop level as unused (OFF).
Type 1: BSS 0
Type 2 (For reference):BM:SLEV:STAT OFF
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.25 BSV/?BSV
Description
Sets/inquires the stop level.
Parameters
Stop level-100.00 (-100%) to +100.00 (+100%), Resolution:0.01 (0.01%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:SLEVel {<stop level>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:SLEVel? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the stop level as +33.3%.
Type 1: BSV 33.3
Type 2 (For reference):BM:SLEV 33.3
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2146.3.26 BTY/?BTY
Description
Selects/inquires the burst type.
Parameters
Burst type selection (0 to 3)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: BURSt (Burst)
1: TRIGger (Trigger)
2: GATE(Gate)
3: TGATe (Trigger gate)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:TYPE {BURSt|TRIGger|GATE|TGATe}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:TYPE?
Setting example
Set the burst type as Gate.
Type 1: BTY 2
Type 2 (For reference):BM:TYPE GATE
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.27 CDC (WF1948)
Description
Copy the setting between the channels.
If the source and destination channels are identical, a parameter error occurs.
Parameters
Destination channel (1 to 2)
Source channel (1 to 2)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :CHANnel:DATA:COPY <dst_channel>,<src_channel>
Query: None
Setting example
Copy the setting of CH 1 to CH 2.
Type 1: CDC 2,1
Type 2 (For reference):CHAN:DATA:COPY 2,1
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2156.3.28 CHA/?CHA (WF1948)
Description
Selects/inquires the channel.
Parameters
Channel number (1 to 2)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :CHANnel[:SELect] <channel>
Query: :CHANnel[:SELect]?
Setting example
Select CH 1.
Type 1: CHA 1
Type 2 (For reference):CHAN 1
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.29 CLS
Description
Clears the event status register that is reflected to each bit of the status byte.
•Standard event status register•Operation event status register•Overload event status register•Warning event status register•CH 1 operation event status register•CH 1 Overload event status register•CH 1 Warning event status register•CH 2 operation event status register (WF1948)•CH 2 Overload event status register (WF1948)•CH 2 Warning event status register (WF1948)
In addition, cancels the received OPC/?OPC command, and then clears the error queue.
Parameters
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *CLSQuery: None
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2166.3.30 CMO/?CMO (WF1948)
Description
Selects/inquires the channel mode.
Parameters
Channel mode (1 to 5)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)1: INDependent(2 channels independent)
2: PHASe(2 phase)
3: TONE(Constant frequency difference)
4: RATio(Constant frequency ratio)
5: DIFFerential(Differential output)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :CHANnel:MODE {INDependent|PHASe|TONE|RATio|DIFFerential }Query: :CHANnel:MODE?
Setting example
Set the channel mode as 2 channels independent.
Type 1: CMO 1
Type 2 (For reference):CHAN:MODE IND
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.31 CPL/?CPL (WF1948)
Description
Selects/inquires the simultaneous setting.
Parameters
Simultaneous setting selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Simultaneous setting OFF)1
: ON (Simultaneous setting ON)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :INSTrument:COUPle {ALL|NONE}
Query: :INSTrument:COUPle?
Setting example
Select "Use simultaneous setting (ON)".
Type 1: CPL 1
Type 2 (For reference):INST:COUP ALL
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.32 CTA/?CTA
Description
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)217

Sets/inquires the center value of amplitude sweep.
Cannot be set if dBV, dBm, or LOG (as user-defined unit) is selected. Returns"INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as amplitude setting (AMV)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:CENTer{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]Setting example
Set the center value of amplitude sweep as 5.5Vp-p/open (It is assumes that the unit ofamplitude is Vp-p, and LOAD is set as OPEN in advance).
Type 1: CTA 5.5
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:CENT 5.5
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.33 CTE/?CTE
Description
Inquires the center value of DC offset sweep setting/. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as
the user-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the DC offset setting (OFS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer{<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:CENTer?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the center value of DC offset sweep as 0V/open (It is assumes that the unit of DC
offset is V, and LOAD is set as OPEN in advance).
Type 1: CTE 0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:CENT 0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2186.3.34 CTF/?CTF
Description
Sets/inquires the value of center frequency sweep. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as
the user-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the frequency setting (FRQ)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the center value of frequency as 5.5kHz.
Type 1: CTF 5.5E+03
Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:CENT 5.5E+03
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.35 CTP/?CTP
Description
Sets/inquires the center value of phase sweep. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as theuser-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the phase setting (PHS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:CENTer {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the center value of phase as 0deg.
Type 1: CTP 0
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:CENT 0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)219

6.3.36 CTU/?CTU
Description
Inquires the center value of duty sweep setting/. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as theuser-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the duty setting (DTY)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer {<duty cycle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the center value of duty sweep as 50%.
Type 1: CTU 50
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:CENT 50
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.37 DDV/?DDV
Description
Sets/inquires the pulse width deviation of pulse width modulation.
The setting range can be changed through the front panel and the DTT command.
Cannot be set if LOG is selected as the user-defined unit.
Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
Set the duty
When the setting range is 0.01% to 99.9%
0.0000 (0%) 99.9800 (99.8%)
When the setting range is 0% to 100%
0.0000 (0%) 100.0000 (100%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PWM:DEViation {<peak deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PWM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the pulse width deviation of pulse width modulation as 10%.
Type 1: DDV 10
Type 2 (For reference):PWM:DEV 10

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)220

Compatibility Information
Change the duty setting to 1/2 of that.
WF1947/WF1948 treats the peak deviation of 50% as the maximum.
For details, see "2. Command Descriptions Descriptions of Individual Commands[:SOURce[1|2]]:PWM[:DEViation]:DCYCle."

6.3.38 DFC/?DFC
Description
Selects/inquires the modulation waveform of pulse width modulation.
Parameters
Modulation waveform selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SINusoid (sine wave)
1: TRIangle (triangular wave)
2: SQUare (rectangular wave)
3: PRAMp(Rising sawtooth wave)
4: NRAMp(Falling sawtooth wave)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare| PRAMp|NRAMp}
Query: [:SOURce]:PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Setting example
Set the modulation waveform of pulse width modulation as falling sawtooth wave.
Type 1: DFC 4
Type 2 (For reference):PWM:INT:FUNC NRAM
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.39 DFQ/?DFQ
Description
Sets/inquires the modulation frequency of pulse width.
Parametersmodulation frequency : 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) 1000000 (1MHz),
Resolution: 5 digits for 1Hz or higher, 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) for less than 1Hz
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PWM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

221

Setting example
Set the modulation frequency of pulse width modulation as 100Hz.
Type 1: DFQ 100
Type 2 (For reference):PWM:INT:FREQ 100
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.(250Hz → 1MHz)

6.3.40 DTT/?DTT
Description
Sets/inquires the setting timing of duty variable square wave.
Parameters
Setting timing of duty variable square wave
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: ASYNchronous (The setting value is immediately effective)
1: SYNChronous (The value that is set immediately before the cycle is effectiveat the end of one cycle)
2: EXPand(The setting range of duty is 0.0000% to 100.0000%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:TYPE {SYNChronous|ASYNchronous|EXPand}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:TYPE?
Setting example
Sets the setting timing of duty variable square wave as cycle synchronization.
Type 1: DTT 1
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:TYPE SYNC
Compatibility Information
The setting as immediately effective is changed to 1: SYNChronous (the value that is set
immediately before the cycle is effective at the end of one cycle).

6.3.41 DTU/?DTU
Description
Selects/queries the duty unit.
Parameters
Duty unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: PERCent (%)
1: USER(User-defined unit)
Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to "PERCent".

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

222

Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT {PERCent|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:UNIT?
Setting example
Set the duty unit as %.
Type 1: DTU 0
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:UNIT PERC
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.42 DTY/?DTY
Description
Sets/queries the duty.
The setting range can be changed through the front panel and the DXX command.
Parameters
Set the duty
When the setting range is 0.01% to 99.9%
0.0100 (0.01%) to 99.9900 (99.99%), Resolution:0.0001 (0.0001%)
When the setting range is 0% to 100%
0.0000 (0%) to 100.0000 (100%), Resolution:0.0001 (0.0001%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle {<duty cycle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the duty as 20%.
Type 1: DTY 20
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC 20
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.43 EAS/?EAS
Description
Selects/inquires the external addition.
Parameters
Status selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Set the external addition as OFF)1
: ON (Set the external addition as ON)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:EXTernal:ADD:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce]:EXTernal:ADD:STATe?

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

223

Setting example
Turns on the external addition.
Type 1: EAS 1
Type 2 (For reference):EXT:ADD:STAT ON
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.44 ?ERR
Description
Inquires errors.
Response format
Error number, message☞See "Error Message".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :SYSTem:ERRor?
Response example
ERR 0,“No error”
Compatibility Information
Returns the corresponding error message of WF1947/WF1948.

6.3.45 ESE/?ESE
Description
Sets the standard event status enable register as write/read.
Parameters
The mask (allow/disallow) pattern 0 to 255 of the standard event status enable register,
enabled when 1 is set to the bit
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *ESE <enable value>
Query: *ESE?
Setting example
Set all of the standard event status enable registers as disable
Type 1: ESE 0
Type 2 (For reference): *ESE 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

224

6.3.46 ?ESR
Description
Read the standard event status register.
When reading by using the query command, all bits are cleared to zero.
Response format
Contents of the standard event status register (0 to 255)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: *ESR?
Response example
ESR 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.47 FDl/?FDl (WF1948)
Description
Sets/inquires the difference of frequency at the time of 2TONE. The unit specified at the
selected channel ("CHA" command) is used (However, treated as [Hz] if LOG is
specified as the user-defined unit).
When frequency is set to each of CH1 and CH2 and inquired with "?FDI", the frequency
difference value is returned.
Parameters
Frequency difference at 2TONE:
0 (0Hz)  29999999.99999999 (29999999.99999999Hz)
Resolution:0.00000001 (10nHz)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :CHANnel:DELTa {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: :CHANnel:DELTa? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the frequency difference as 1kHz.
Type 1: FDI 1000
Type 2 (For reference):CHAN:DELT 1000
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.
(14999999.99999999Hz → 29999999.99999999Hz)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2256.3.48 FDV/?FDV
Description
Sets/inquires the frequency deviation of frequency modulation. Cannot be set if LOG isselected as the user-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range: when the unit is "Hz",0 (0Hz) 29999999.99999999 (29999999.99999999Hz),
Resolution:0.00000001 (10nHz)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FM:DEViation {<peak deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the deviation of frequency modulation as 1kHz.
Type 1: FDV 1E+03
Type 2 (For reference):FM:DEV 1E+03
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.
(14999999.99999998Hz → 29999999.99999999Hz)

6.3.49 FFC/?FFC
Description
Selects/inquires the modulation waveform of frequency modulation.
Parameters
Modulation waveform selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SINusoid (sine wave)
1: TRIangle (triangular wave)
2: SQUare (rectangular wave)
3: PRAMp(Rising sawtooth wave)
4: NRAMp(Falling sawtooth wave)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare| PRAMp|NRAMp}
Query: [:SOURce]:FM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Setting example
Changes a modulation waveform of frequency modulation into a sine wave.
Type 1: FFC 0
Type 2 (For reference):FM:INT:FUNC SIN
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.50 FFQ/?FFQ
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)226

Description
Sets/inquires the modulation frequency of frequency modulation.
Parametersmodulation frequency : 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) 1000000 (1MHz),
Resolution: 5 digits for 1Hz or higher, 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) for less than 1Hz
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the modulation frequency of frequency modulation as 100Hz.
Type 1: FFQ 100
Type 2 (For reference):FM:INT:FREQ 100
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.(500Hz → 1MHz)

6.3.51 FNC/?FNC
Description
Selects/inquires the waveform.
Parameters
Waveform selection (1 to 7)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
1: SINusoid(Sine wave)
2: TRIangle(Triangle wave)
3: FSQUare(Duty 50% fixed square wave)
4: PRAMp(Rising sawtooth wave)
5: NRAMp(Falling sawtooth wave)
6: USER(Arbitrary Waveform)
7: VSQUare(Duty variable square wave)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FUNCtion:SHAPe{SINusoid|TRIangle|FSQUare| PRAMp|NRAMp|USER|VSQUare}
Query: [:SOURce]:FUNCtion:SHAPe?
Setting example
Set the waveform as triangular wave.
Type 1: FNC 2Type 2 (For reference):FUNC:SHAP TRI
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2276.3.52 FRA/?FRA (WF1948)
Description
Sets/inquires the frequency ratio at the time of RATIO.
The frequency unit specification for CH1 or CH2 has no impact. If the frequency is set
for each of CH1 and CH2, and then inquire with "?FRA", the setting value with theprevious "FRA" is returned instead of the frequency ratio of those.
ParametersFrequency ratio of CH 1 (1 to 9999999)
Frequency ratio of CH 2 (1 to 9999999)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :CHANnel:RATio {<valuel>,<value2>}
Query: :CHANhel:RATio?
Setting example
Frequency ratio to 2:3.
Type 1: FRA 2,3
Type 2 (For reference):CHAN:RAT 2,3
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.53 FRQ/?FRQ
Description
Sets/inquires the frequency. The setting for frequency sweep is ignored.
For query to frequency sweep/modulation, the instantaneous value of the query is
returned.
Parameters
Frequency setting (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
When the unit is Hz, the setting range is 10E-09 (10nHz) to 30E+06 (30MHz)
The resolution is 0.01µHz.
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the frequency as 1MHz.
Type 1: FRQ 1E+06
Type 2 (For reference):FREQ 1E+06
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.(15MHz → 30MHz)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2286.3.54 FRU/?FRU
Description
Selects/inquires the unit of frequency.
Parameters
Frequency unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: HZ (Hz)1: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to "Hz" .
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:UNIT {HZ|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:UNIT?
Setting example
Set the unit of frequency as Hz.
Type 1: FRU 0
Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:UNIT HZCompatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.55 FSS
Description
Sets the output as the start value/stop value in the frequency sweep.
Parameters
Start value/stop value (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: STOP (Sets the output as the stop value)
1: STARt (Sets the output as the starting value)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STATe {STARt|STOP}
Query: None

Setting example
Sets the output as the stop value in the frequency sweep.
Type 1: FSS 0
Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:STAT STOP
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)229

6.3.56 GET
Description
As with the group execute trigger (GET), this works as follows.
•In the burst mode, it trigger once for the trigger oscillation or the triggered gateoscillation.
•In the sweep mode, it starts a sweep once for the single sweep or the g ates sweep. Notethat correspond bits on the operation event register is set or cleared once the sweep start.
The combination of sweep parameters is beyond the allowable setting range, errors
occur.
Parameters
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *TRG
Query: None
Note
While executing the sweep, when the oscillation mode is changed on the other channel,
the sweep is aborted.
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.57 HDR/?HDR
Description
Selects/queries of/off of a response header to the inquiry message of a type 1 command.
The response header in not attached to the inquiry for type 2 (For reference).
Parameters
Selection of header On/Off (0/1)
0: OFF (a header is not attached)1: ON (a header is attached)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: None
Setting example
A header is not attached.
Type 1: HDR 0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2306.3.58 HIV/?HIV
Description
Sets/queries the setting of the high level. This setting is ignored during theamplitude/offset sweep.
In a query for the amplitude/offset sweep and the modulation, an instantaneous value isreturned at that time.
When LOG is used with the high level user-defined unit of the "UHU" command,
specify as follows.
When the actual high level is 0, the response is “-INF” or “+INF”. To specify the value,
specify “-INF”/“+INF”.
When the actual high level is negative, the response is “OVER”. You cannot specify theactual high level as negative.
Parameters
High level setting (the range changes based on the unit and the LOAD settings)
When the range is 10V ,the load is open, and the unit is V: -10 (-10V) to + 10 (10V)
When the user-defined unit is selected, the setting/query cannot be less than 0V.
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH{<high>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the high level to +5V. It is assumed that the high level unit is selected as V, andLOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: HIV 5
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:HIGH 5
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The maximum value is changed, compared to the old WF194x.(20V

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)→ 10V)

231

6.3.59 HLE/?HLE
Description
Selects/queries the status of the sweep poses input connector for remote.
•The sweep pose input connector is always enabled on local.
•At power-on, When the PST (:SYSTem:PRESet) or RST (*RST) command is executed,
it become HLE 1.
Parameters
Status selection (0/1)
Type 1, 2
Type 2 (For reference):0: OFF (disables SWEEP PAUSE IN)
1: ON (enables SWEEP PAUSE IN)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :TRIGger[:SEQueunce]:PIN:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: :TRIGger[:SEQueunce]:PIN:STATe?
Setting example
Enables SWEEP PAUSE IN.
Type 1: HLE 1
Type 2 (For reference):TRIG:PIN:STAT ON
Compatibility Information
Although any errors do not occur, the command does not work.

6.3.60 HVU/?HVU
Description
Selects/queries the high level unit. When a unit is selected, units of low level and DC
offset are also changed.
Parameters
High level unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0
:V
(V)
1
: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"V".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT{V|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:HIGH:UNIT?
Setting example
Sets the high level unit to V.
Type 1: HVU 0Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:HIGH:UNIT V
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2326.3.61 ?IDT
Description
Reads the device ID.
Response format
Returns “NF corporation, the model number, the serial number, the version” in the string
format.
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: *IDN?
Response example
IDT “NF Corporation,WF1947,1234567,Ver1.00”
Compatibility Information
Returns the device information of WF1947/WF1948.
A response example of the previous WF194x series IDT “NF
corporation,WF1943B,0000000,1.00”

6.3.62 LOV/?LOV
Description
Sets/queries the low level. The setting for the amplitude/offset sweep is ignored.
In a query for the amplitude/offset sweep and the modulation, an instantaneous value isreturned at that time.
When LOG is used with the low level user-defined unit of the "ULU" command, specify
as follows.
When the actual low level is 0, the response is “-INF” or “+INF”. To specify the value,
specify “-INF”/“+INF”.
When the actual low level is negative, the response is “OVER”. You cannot specify theactual low level as negative.
Parameters
Low level setting (the range changes based on the unit and the LOAD settings)
When the range is 10V ,the load is open, and the unit is V: -10 (-10V) to + 10 (+10V)
When the user-defined unit is selected, the setting/query cannot be less than 0V.
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW{<low>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the low level to 0V/open. It is assumed that the low level unit is selected as V, andLOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: LOV 0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:LOW 0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
The minimum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.(-20V-10V)
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)→
2336.3.63 LVU/?LVU
Description
Selects/queries the low level unit. When a unit is selected, units of high level and DC
offset are also changed.
Parameters
Low level unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0
:V
(V)
1
: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"V".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT {V|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LOW:UNIT?
Setting example
Sets the low level unit to V.
Type 1: LVU 0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:LOW:UNIT V
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.64 MCO/?MCO
Description
Sets/queries the comment of the setting memory.
Parameters
The number of the setting memory (1 to 10) to add a comment
Comment (string data, up to 20 characters)
In query commands, the parameter is only .
Response format
The setting number and a comment of memory
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :MEMory:STATe:COMMent {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10},<comment>
Query: :MEMory:STATe:COMMent? {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}
Setting example
Writes a comment “Comment” to the first setting memory.
Type 1: MCO 1,“Comment”
Type 2 (For reference):MEM:STAT:COMM 1,“Comment”
Query example
Sets/queries the comment of the first setting memory.
Type 1: ?MCO 1
Type 2 (For reference):MEM:STAT:COMM? 1

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

234

Compatibility Information
The method to specified memory number is changed from the previous WF194x series.
(0 to 9 → 1 to 10)
The set memory comments are not recorded.
They are initialized at power-on.

6.3.65 MDL
Description
Deletes the setting memory.
Parameters
The setting memory number to delete (1 to 10)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :MEMory:STATe:DELete {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}
Query: None
Setting example
Deletes the first setting memory.
Type 1: MDL 1
Type 2 (For reference):MEM:STAT:DEL 1
Compatibility Information
The method to specified memory number is changed from the previous WF194x series.
(0 to 9 → 1 to 10)

6.3.66 MDO/?MDO (WF1948)
Description
Selects/inquires whether to operate start/stop of modulation from the panel key and theexternal control separately for each channel, or common to both channels.
Parameters
Operation status selection (0/1)
Type 1
Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Independent for each channel)
1: ON (Common to both channels)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:MODulation:OCOMmon {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce]:MODulation:OCOMmon?
Setting example
Makes the start/stop operation common to both channels.
Type 1: MDO 1
Type 2 (For reference):MOD:OCOM ON
Compatibility Information
In case of common channel setting (1 or ON), when setting the command to change
frequency or amplitude, it is set as common to both channels.
If you set different frequency or amplitude for each channel, set as 0 or OFF once, andthen set the frequency and/or amplitude.
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)235

6.3.67 MKA/?MKA
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of the amplitude sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as amplitude setting (AMV)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:MARKer{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:MARKer?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the marker value of the amplitude sweep to 5Vp-p/open. It is assumed that theamplitude unit is Vp-p, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: MKA 5
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:MARK 5
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.68 MKE/?MKE
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of the DC offsets sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the DC offset setting (OFS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MARKer{<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:MARKer?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the marker value of the DC offset sweep to 0V. It is assumed that the unit of DC
offset is V, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: MKE 0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:MARK 0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.69 MKF/?MKF
Description
Sets/inquires the value of marker frequency sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the frequency setting (FRQ)
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

236

Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:MARKer {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:MARKer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the marker value of the frequency sweep to 5kHz.
Type 1: MKF 5E03
Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:MARK 5E03
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.70 MKP/?MKP
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of the phase sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the phase setting (PHS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:MARKer {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:MARKer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the marker value of the phase sweep to 0deg.
Type 1: MKP 0
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:MARK 0
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.71 MKU/?MKU
Description
Sets/queries the marker value of duty sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the duty setting (DTY)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:MARKer {<duty cycle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:MARKer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the marker value of duty sweep as 50%.
Type 1: MKU 50
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:MARK 50
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.72 MRK/?MRKWF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

237

Description
Sets/queries the mark wave number (the frequency for the burst oscillation and trigger
oscillation).
Parameters
Mark wave number setting
0.5 (0.5 waves) to 999999.5 (999999.5 waves)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:MARK {<mark>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:MARK? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the mark wave number to 10 waves.
Type 1: MRK 10Type 2 (For reference):BM:MARK 10
Compatibility Information
The maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
(500000.0 waves → 999999.5 waves)
It is supported when the auto burst and trigger burst modes are set.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)238

6.3.73 MSK/?MSKDescription
Writes/reads the service request enable register.
Each bit of the service request enable register corresponds to each bit of the status byte.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The pattern for the mask of the service request enable register (enable/disable) pattern 0
to 255.
When the bit is 1, SRQ become enabled
However, bit 6 does not become enabled. If 255 is sent, 191 is set
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *SRE <enable value>
Query: *SRE?
Setting example
Generates the SRQ only on the overload event.
Type 1: MSK 1
Type 2 (For reference): *SRE 1☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.74 MTY/?MTY
Description
Selects/inquires the modulation type.
Parameters
Modulation type selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: FREQuency(Frequency)
1: PHASe(Phase)2: AMPLitude(Amplitude)3: OFFSet(DC Offset)
4: DUTY(Duty)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:MODulation:TYPE{FREQuency|PHASe|AMPLitude|OFFSet|DUTY}
Query: [:SOURce]:MODulation:TYPE?

Setting example
Sets the modulation type to the phase modulation.
Type 1: MTY 1
Type 2 (For reference):MOD:TYPE PHAS
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)239

6.3.75 ?OC1
Description
Inquire CH 1 operation event status register.
The CH 1 operation event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed•Reading is performed in a query command (B9, B11)
The relationship between each operation and set/clear of the bits is as follows.
(-shows not changed)

Start
Modulation/
Pause
Sweep
Clear pause
Stop
Start
Oscillation
Stop
Load
the status register

B3(executing)
SET
CLEAR
SET
CLEAR
-

B9
(start)
SET
SET
-

B10
(pause)
CLEAR
SET
CLEAR
CLEAR
-

B11
(stop)
SET
SET
-

B12
(space)
CLEAR
SET

-

CLEAR

-

CLEAR

-

Response format
A value (0 to 65535) of CH 1 operation event status register
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :STATus:OPERation:CH1:CONDition?
Response example
OC1 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2406.3.76 ?OC2 (WF1948)
Description
Inquire CH 2 operation event status register.
The CH 2 operation event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed•Reading is performed in a query command (B9, B11)
The relationship between each operation and set/clear of the bits is as follows.
(-shows not changed)
B3(executing)

B9(start)B10(pause)B11(stop)

B12(space)Modulation/
Sweep

Start
Pause
Clear pause
Stop

SET
CLEAR
SET
CLEAR

SET
SET
-

CLEAR
SET
CLEAR
CLEAR

SET
SET

-

Oscillation

Start
Stop

-

-

-

-

CLEAR
SET

Load
the status register

-

CLEAR

-

CLEAR

-

Response format
A value (0 to 65535) of CH 2 operation event status register
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :STATus:OPERation:CH2: CONDition?
Response example
OC2 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2416.3.77 ODV/?ODV
Description
Sets/queries the DC offset deviation for the DC offset modulation. Cannot be set if LOG
is selected as the user-defined unit. Returns “INVALID” as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
DC offset deviation for DC offset modulation(The range changes based on the unit and the LOAD settings)
When the range is 10V, the load is open, the unit is V: 0 (0V) to 20 (20V)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:OM:DEViation {<peak deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:OM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the deviation for the DC offset modulation to 1V.
Type 1: ODV 1
Type 2 (For reference):OM:DEV 1
Compatibility Information
Change the DC offset deviation setting to 1/2 of that.
WF1947/WF1948 treats the DC offset deviation of 10V as the maximum.
For details, see "2. Command Descriptions Descriptions of Individual Commands[:SOURce[1|2]]:OFSM[:DEViation]."

6.3.78 OE1/?OE1
Description
Sets/queries the CH 1 operation event status enable register. When the clear at power-on
flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the CH 1 operation event status enable register (0to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:OPERation:CH1: ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:OPERation:CH1: ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the CH 1 operation event status enable register to
8 (bit 3: single/gated sweep)
Type 1: OE1 8Type 2 (For reference):STAT:OPER:CH1: ENAB 8☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.79 OE2/?OE2 (WF1948)
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

242

Description
Sets/queries the CH 2 operation event status enable register.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the CH 2 operation event status enable register (0to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:OPERation:CH2: ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:OPERation:CH2: ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the CH 2 operation event status enable register to
512 (bit 9: single/gated sweep)
Type 1: OE2 512
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:OPER:CH2: ENAB 512☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.80 OFC/?OFC)
Description
Sets/queries the modulation waveform for the DC offset modulation.
Parameters
Modulation waveform selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SINusoid(Sine wave)
1: TRIangle(Triangle wave)
2: SQUare(Rectangular wave)
3: PRAMp(Rising sawtooth wave)
4: NRAMp(Falling sawtooth wave)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:OM:INTernal:FUNCtion{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|PRAMp|NRAMp}
Query: [:SOURce]:OM:INTernal:FUNCtion?

Setting example
Set the modulation waveform of DC offset modulation as rising sawtooth wave.
Type 1: OFC 3
Type 2 (For reference):OM:INT:FUNC PRAM
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.81 OFQ/?OFQ
Description
Sets/queries the modulation frequency for the DC offset modulation.
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)243

Parameters
Modulation frequency : 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) 100000 (100kHz),
Resolution: 5 digits for 1Hz or higher, 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) for less than 1Hz
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:OM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:OM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the modulation frequency of DC offset modulation as 100Hz.
Type 1: OFQ 100
Type 2 (For reference):OM:INT:FREQ 100
Compatibility Information
The maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.(500Hz →100kHz)6.3.82 OFS/?OFS
Description
Sets/queries DC offset. During offset sweep, this setting is ignored.
In a query for the offset sweep and the modulation, an instantaneous value is returned atthat time.
When the user-defined unit LOG is used as the unit of DC offset, do as follows.
When the actual DC offset is 0, the response is "-INF" or "+INF". To set to this value,
specify "-INF"/"+INF".
When the actual DC offset is negative, the response is "OVER". You cannot specify theactual DC offset as negative.
Parameters
DC offset setting (the range changes based on the unit and the LOAD settings)
When the range is 10V ,the load is open, and the unit is V: -10 (-10V) to + 10 (10V)
When a user-defined unit is selected, it may not be possible to set less than 0V.
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet{<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets DC offset to 2.5V/open. It is assumed that the unit of DC offset is V, and LOAD isset to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: OFS 2.5
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS 2.5
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.83 OFU/?OFU
Description
Selects/inquires the unit of DC offset.
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)244

Parameters
DC offset unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0
:V
(V)
1
: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"V".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT{V|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:UNIT?
Setting example
Sets the unit of DC offset to the user-defined unit.
Type 1: OFU 1
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:UNIT USER
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2456.3.84 OLD/?OLD
Description
Sets/inquires the LOAD function.
It is a function to set the actual output voltage when the load connects FUNCTION OUT.
Between the actual output voltage and the output voltage when the load is open, thefollowing relation exists:[the actual output voltage]=[the output voltage when the load is open]×[Load impedance setting]
50＋[Load impedance setting]Parameters
Load impedance
1 (1) 10000 (10000)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :OUTPut:LOAD {<load>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: :OUTPut:LOAD? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Allows FUNCTION OUT to set/display the actual output voltage when terminated at50.
Type 1: OLD 50
Type 2 (For reference):OUTP:LOAD 50
Compatibility Information
The minimum and maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
(45999 → 110000)

6.3.85 OLS/?OLS
Description
Selects/queries the On/Off of the LOAD function.
Parameters
Termination status
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Sets/displays the voltage when the load is opened)1: ON (Sets/displays the actual output voltage when terminated at the load
specified in OLD)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :OUTPut:LOAD:STATe
Query: :OUTPut:LOAD:STATe?

{0|1|OFF|ON}

Setting example
Sets/displays the voltage when the load is opened (the LOAD function is off).
Type 1: OLS 0
Type 2 (For reference):OUTP:LOAD:STAT OFF

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

246

Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.86 OMO/?OMO
Description
Selects/inquires the oscilaltion mode.
Parameters
The selection of oscillation mode (0 to 5)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: NORMal(Continuous)
1: BURSt(Burst)2: SWEep(Sweep)3: MODulation(Modulation)
4: NOISe(Noise)5: DC(DC)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:MODE {NORMal|BURSt|SWEep|MODulation|NOISe|DC}
Query: [:SOURce]:MODE?
Setting example
Enables the burst oscillation mode.
Type 1: OMO 1
Type 2 (For reference):MODE BURS
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.87 OPC/?OPC
Description
This is a command to notify the single/gated sweep on each channel has finished. When
the OPC command is executed and the single/gated sweep on each channel has finished,
the OPC bit on the normal event status register is set.
When the ?OPC command is executed and the single/gated sweep on each channel has
finished, the response is 1.
The bit is reset at power-on.
Parameters
None
Response format
1 (the response is just 1 without the header)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *OPC
Query: *OPC?
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)247

6.3.88 ORG/?ORG
Description
Selects/queries the output range.
Parameters
Output range (0 to 2)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: AUTO (auto range selection)
1: 10V (10V range)
2: 1V (1V range)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :OUTPut:RANGe {AUTO|10V|1V}| {AUTO|2V|200mV|20mV}
Query: :OUTPut:RANGe?
Setting example
Enables the auto range.
Type 1: ORG 0
Type 2 (For reference):OUTP:RANG AUTO
Compatibility Information
Although any errors do not occur with a command to select the range, it is enable withthe auto range setting.
In the command, the range hold setting of WF1947/WF1948 is not available.

6.3.89 ?OSC
Description
Inquire operation event status register.
The operation event status register is cleared in the following cases.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
Response format
A value (0 to 65535) of operation event status register
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: :STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Response example
OSC 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2486.3.90 OSE/?OSE
Description
Sets/queries the operation event status enable register.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the operation event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the operation event status enable register to 3
(both bit 0: the CH 1 operation event status register and bit 1: the CH2 operation event
status register).
Type 1: OSE 3
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:OPER:ENAB 3☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)249

6.3.91 OSS
Description
Sets the output as the start value/stop value in the DC offset sweep.
Parameters
Start value/stop value (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: STOP (Sets the output as the stop value)
1: STARt (Sets the output as the starting value)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STATe {STARt|STOP}
Query: None
Setting example
Sets the output as the stop value in the DC offset sweep.
Type 1: OSS 0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:STAT STOP
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.92 PDV/?PDV
Description
Sets/queries the phase deviation for the phase modulation. Cannot be set if LOG isselected as the user-defined unit. When queried, "INVALID" is returned.
Parameters
When the phase for the phase modulation is deviation and the unit is deg
0.000 (0deg) to 3600.000 (3600deg), the resolution: 0.001 (0.001deg)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PM:DEViation {<peak deviation>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the deviation for the phase modulation to 90deg.
Type 1: PDV 90
Type 2 (For reference):PM:DEV 90
Compatibility Information
Set the phase deviation setting up to 180.000deg.
WF1947/WF1948 treats the phase deviation of 180.000deg as the maximum.
For details, see "2. Command Descriptions, Descriptions of Individual Commands,[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM[:DEViation]."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2506.3.93 PFC/?PFC
Description
Selects/queries the modulation waveform for the phase modulation.
Parameters
Modulation waveform selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SINusoid(Sine wave)
1: TRIangle(Triangle wave)
2: SQUare(Rectangular wave)
3: PRAMp(Rising sawtooth wave)
4: NRAMp(Falling sawtooth wave)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|PRAMp|NRAMp}
Query: [:SOURce]:PM:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Setting example
Changes a modulation waveform of phase modulation into a triangular w ave.
Type 1: PFC 1
Type 2 (For reference):PM:INT:FUNC TRI
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.94 PFQ/?PFQ
Description
Sets/inquires the modulation frequency of phase.
Parameters
Modulation frequency : 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) 1000000 (1MHz)
5 digits for the resolution of :1Hz or higher, 0.1E-3 (0.1mHz) for less than 1Hz
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the modulation frequency of phase modulation as 100Hz.
Type 1: PFQ 100
Type 2 (For reference):PM:INT:FREQ 100
Compatibility Information
The maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.(500Hz →1MHz)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2516.3.95 PHS/?PHS
Description
Sets/inquires the phase. During phase sweep, this setting is ignored.
For query to phase sweep/modulation, the instantaneous value of the query is returned.
When LOG is used with the phase user-defined unit of the "PHU" command, specify as
follows.
When the actual phase is 0, the response is "-INF" or "+INF". To set to this value,
specify "-INF"/"+INF".
When the actual phase is negative, the response is "OVER". You cannot specify theactual phase as negative in this case.
Parameters
Phase setting (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
When the unit is the degree, the setting range is as follows.
-1800.000 (-1800deg) to +1800.000 (+1800deg), resolution: 0.001 (0.001deg)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the phase to 90deg.
Type 1: PHS 90
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS 90
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.96 PHU/?PHU
Description
Selects/inquires the unit of phase.
Parameters
Phase unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: DEG (degree)1: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"DEG".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:UNIT {DEG|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:UNIT?
Setting example
Sets the unit of the phase to user-defined unit.
Type 1: PHU 1
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:UNIT USER
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support
WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

252

6.3.97 POS/?POS
Description
Selects/queries the output status at power-on.
Parameters
Output status at power-on (0 to 2)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0: LAST (restores to the status when power is previously turned off)1
: OFF (off)2: ON (on)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :SYSTem:PON {LAST|OFF|ON}
Query: :SYSTem:PON?
Setting example
Turns the output on at power-on.
Type 1: POS 2
Type 2 (For reference):SYST:PON ON
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.98 PRD/?PRD
Description
Sets/inquires the frequency. During frequency sweep, this setting is ignored.
For query to frequency sweep/modulation, the instantaneous value of the query is
returned.
Parameters
Cycle setting (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
When the unit is the second, the setting range is as follows.
33.333333334E-09 (33.333333334ns=30MHz) 100E+06 (100000000s=10nHz)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod {<period>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the period to 1µs.
Type 1: PRD 1E-06
Type 2 (For reference):PULSE:PER 1E-06
Compatibility Information
The minimum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
(66.666666667ns=15MHz  33.333333334ns=30MHz)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2536.3.99 PRU/?PRU
Description
Selects/inquires the frequency unit.
Parameters
Cycle unit selection (0/1)
When the unit is changed, the unit of the pulse width is also changed.
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SEC (s: second)1: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"SEC".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT {SEC|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod:UNIT?
Setting example
Set the unit of cycle as s.
Type 1: PRU 0
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:PER SEC
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.100

PSC/?PSC
Description
Controls/loads the clear at power-on flag for status register (status/status enable/service
request enable).
When this flag set, all of status registers are cleared at power-on. However, the PON bitof the standard event status register is not cleared. Also, although the status byte is notincluded in the status register, eventually it becomes all zero.
This flag is set to 1 at factory shipment and when any error occurs due to the backup
battery drain.
Parameters
The status of the clear at power-on flag (0/1)
0: Not clear the status register at power-on
1: Clear the status register at power-on
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *PSC {0|1}
Query: *PSC?
Setting example
Clear the status register at power-on.
Type 1: PSC 1
Type 2 (For reference): *PSC 1
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

254

6.3.101

PSS
Description
Sets the output as the start value/stop value in the phase sweep.
Parameters
Start value/stop value (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: STOP (Sets the output as the stop value)
1: STARt (Sets the output as the starting value)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:STATe {STARt|STOP}
Query: None
Setting example
Sets the output as the stop value in the phase sweep.
Type 1: PSS 0
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:STAT STOP
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.102

PST
Description
Sets each setting to the initial value. For the initial values, see the instruction manual ofthe main unit.
Cancels the previous received OPC/?OPC command.
Also, the following event status registers are cleared.
•Operation event status register•Overload event status register•Warning event status register•CH 1 operation event status register•CH 1 Overload event status register•CH 1 Warning event status register•CH 2 operation event status register WF1948•CH 2 Overload event status register WF1948•CH 2 Warning event status register WF1948
Also, the setting status set by the following command changes.
AFM, HLE, TRE
Parameters
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :SYSTem:PRESet
Query: None
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2556.3.103

PUW/?PUW
Description
Sets/inquires the pulse width. During duty sweep, this setting is ignored. For query to
duty sweep/pulse width modulation, the instantaneous value of the query is returned.
Parameters
Pulse width setting (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
When the unit is the second, the setting range is as follows.
When the unit is s, it is 24.0E-09 (24ns) to 99.983E+06 (99.983Ms)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:WIDTh {<width>|MINimum| MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:WIDTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the pulse wave to 1ms.
Type 1: PUW 0.001
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:WIDT 0.001
Compatibility Information
The minimum and maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
(0.0066666666667ns 99990000s → 24ns 99.983Ms)

6.3.104

PWU/?PWU
Description
Selects/inquires the unit of pulse width.
When the unit is selected, the unit of the period is also changed.
When the pulse width unit is USER, the period user-defined unit is used.
Parameters
Pulse width unit selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SEC (s: second)1: USER (user-defined unit)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"SEC".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:WIDTh:UNIT {SEC|USER|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:WIDTh:UNIT?
Setting example
Set the unit of pulse width as s.
Type 1: PWU 0Type 2 (For reference):PULS:WIDT SEC
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2566.3.105

RCL
Description
Loads the setting.
There are 10 pairs of the setting memories.
If the setting memory that is not saved is loaded, an error occurs.
Parameters
Setting Memory number: 110Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *RCL {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}
Query: None
Setting example
Loads the first setting memory.
Type 1: RCL 1
Type 2 (For reference): *RCL 1
Compatibility Information
The method to specified memory number is changed from the previous WF194x series.
(0 to 9 → 1 to 10)

6.3.106

RST
Description
Initializes the setting.
Sets each setting to the initial value. For the initial values, see the instruction manual ofthe main unit.
Cancels the previous received OPC/?OPC command.
The event status register is not cleared.
Also, the setting status set by the following command changes.
AFM, HLE, TRE
Parameters
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *RSTQuery: None
Compatibility Information
When the RST command is executed, the output is set to off.

6.3.107

SEC/?SEC (WF1948)
Description
Selects/queries the external trigger channel of CH 2 while the single sweep and gatedsweep.
Parameters
Channel number (1 to 2)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)257

1: Use the TRIG/SWEEP IN of CH 1 as the trigger source of CH 2
2: Use the TRIG/SWEEP IN of CH 2 as the trigger source of CH 2
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"2".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:EXTernal:CHANnel {<channel>|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:EXTernal:CHANnel?
Setting example
Use the TRIG/SWEEP IN of CH 1 as the trigger source of CH 2.
Type 1: SEC 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:EXT:CHAN 1
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.108

SES/?SES
Description
Selects/queries the polarity of the trigger signal while the single sweep and gated sweep.
Parameters
Trigger signal polarity (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0: POSitive (Triggers at rising)1: NEGative (triggers at falling)
When setting with Type 2 (For reference), "DEFault" is handled as being equivalent to"NEGative".
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SLOPe?
Setting example
Sets to start the single sweep at rising of the trigger signal.
Type 1: SES 0
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:SLOP POS
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.109

SFC/?SFC
Description
Selects/queries the sweep function.
Parameters
Select (0 to 1) Sweep function
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: TRIangle (triangular waveform sweep)1: RAMP (ramp waveform sweep)
Type 2 (For reference)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

258

Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion{SINusoid|TRIangle|SQUare|RAMP|DEFault}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:INTernal:FUNCtion?
Setting example
Sets the sweep function to the triangular waveform sweep.
Type 1: SFC 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:INT:FUNC TRI
Compatibility Information
Selection and query of the rectangular and sine waveform sweep in WF194x series a renot supported. Consider other approach.
Followings are commands in WF1947/WF1948 that are available for the sweep.
[Sweep function ]Modulation: specify a sweep function for corresponding each oscillation mode of
FSK, PSK, FM, PM, AM, and AM(DSB-SC).
FSK[:SOURce[1|2]]:FSKey:INTernal:FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
PSK[:SOURce[1|2]]:PSKey:INTernal: FUNCtion[:SHAPe]FM[:SOURce[1|2]]:FM:INTernal: FUNCtion[:SHAPe]PM[:SOURce[1|2]]:PM:INTernal: FUNCtion[:SHAPe]AM[:SOURce[1|2]]:AM:INTernal: FUNCtion[:SHAPe]AM(DSB-SC)[:SOURce[1|2]]:AMSC:INTernal: FUNCtion[:SHAPe]
For details, see "2. Command Descriptions

6.3.110

Descriptions of Individual Commands."

SGS/?SGS
Description
Selects/queries the sweep trigger source for the single sweep and gated sweep.
Parameters
Trigger source (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: INTernal (uses the internal trigger oscillator as the trigger source)
1: EXTernal (uses the signal of the TRIG/SWEEP IN connector as the trigger
source)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SOURce?
Setting example
Sets the signal of the TRIG/SWEEP IN connector as the trigger source.
Type 1: SGS 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:SOUR EXTCompatibility Information
A trigger source of the SWEEP IN connector signal is not supported.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)259

6.3.111

SIG/?SIG
Description
Selects/queries the On/Off of the output.
Parameters
Output status (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (output off)1
: ON (output on)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :OUTPut:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: :OUTPut:STATe?
Setting example
Turn on the output.
Type 1: SIG 1
Type 2 (For reference):OUTP:STAT ON
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.112

SIR/?SIR
Description
Sets/queries the internal trigger period for the single and gates sweep.
Parameters
Internal trigger cycle: 1E-04 (100µs) 10000.0 (10000s)
Resolution: 4 digits for more than 1ms, 1E-07 (0.1µs) for less than 1ms
Type 2 (For reference):
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:INTernal:RATE {<rate>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:INTernal:RATE? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the oscillation period of the internal trigger oscillator to 1ms.
Type 1: SIR 1E-03
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:INT:RATE 1E-03
Compatibility Information
The minimum and maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
( 1µs  100s → 100µs  10000s )The resolution less than 1ms has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
( 1µs → 0.1µs )6.3.113

SLS/?SLS
Description
Selects/queries the stop level to stop oscillation for the gated sweep.
For the duty sweep, this command is disabled.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)260

Parameters
Stop level status (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Stop level OFF)1
: ON (Stop level ON)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SLEVel:STATe?
Setting example
Set the stop level function as unused (OFF).
Type 1: SLS 0
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:SLEV:STAT OFF
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.114

SLV/?SLV
Description
The gated sweep sets/queries the stop level to stop oscillation.
Parameters
Stop level value: -100.00 (-100%) +100.00 (+100%)
Resolution: 0.01 (0.01%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SLEVel {<stop level>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SLEVel? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the stop level as +33.3%.
Type 1: SLV 33.3
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:SLEV 33.3
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.115

SMO/?SMO
Description
Selects/queries the sweep mode.
Parameters
Selects sweep mode (0 to 2)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: SINGle (single sweep)
1: CONTinuous (continuous sweep)
2: GATed (gated sweep)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:MODE {SINGle|CONTinuous|GATed}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:MODE?

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

261

Setting example
Select the continuous sweep.
Type 1: SMO 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:MODE CONT
Compatibility support
Compatibility support

6.3.116

SNA/?SNA
Description
Sets/inquires the value of span amplitude sweep.
Cannot be set if it is any of dBV, dBm, or LOG (as user-defined unit). Returns"INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as amplitude setting (AMV).
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SPAN{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SPAN?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the span value for the amplitude sweep to 9 Vp-p/open. It is assumed that theamplitude unit is Vp-p, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: SNA 9Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:SPAN 9
Compatibility support
Compatibility support

6.3.117

SNE/?SNE
Description
Sets/queries the span value of the DC offsets sweep. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as
the user-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
DC offset span (the range changes based on the unit and the LOAD settings)
When the range is 10 V, the load is open, the unit is V: 0 (0 V) 20 (20 V)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN{<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:SPAN?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the span value of the DC offset sweep to 20 V. It is assumed that the unit of DC
offset is V, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: SNE 20
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:SPAN 20

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

262

Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.118

SNF/?SNF
Description
Sets/inquires the value of span frequency sweep. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as theuser-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
Frequency span (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
0.00000000 (0 Hz) 29999999.99999999 (29999999.99999999 Hz)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:SPAN {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:SPAN? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the span value of the frequency sweep to 9 kHz.
Type 1: SNF 9E+3Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:SPAN 9E+3
Compatibility Information
The maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
(14999999.99999998Hz → 29999999.99999999Hz)

6.3.119

SNP/?SNP
Description
Sets/inquires the value of span phase sweep. It cannot be set
when LOG is selected as the user-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if
inquired.
Parameters
Span phase (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
0.000 (0 deg) to 3600.000 (3600 deg), the resolution: 0.001 (0.001 deg)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:SPAN {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:SPAN? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the span value for the phase sweep to 180 deg.
Type 1: SNP 180
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:SPAN 180
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.120

SNU/?SNU
Description

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

263

Sets/queries the span value of duty sweep. Cannot be set if LOG is selected as theuser-defined unit. Returns "INVALID" as a value, if inquired.
Parameters
Duty span (the range varies depending on the unit setting)
When the setting range is 0.01% to 99.99%: 0.0000 (0%) to 99.9800 (99.98%)
When the setting range is 0% to 100%
0.0000 (0%) 100.0000 (100%)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN {<duty cycle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:SPAN? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the span value of duty sweep as 20%.
Type 1: SNU 20
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:SPAN 20
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.121

SPA/?SPA
Description
Sets/queries the stop value for the amplitude sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as amplitude setting (AMV)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STOP{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STOP?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the stop value for the amplitude sweep to 10 Vp-p/open. It is assumed that theamplitude unit is Vp-p, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: SPA 10
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:STOP 10
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2646.3.122

SPC/?SPC
Description
Sets/queries the space wave number (the frequency for the burst oscillation).
Parameters
Number of space wave setting: 0.5 (0.5 waves) to 999999.5 (999999.5 waves)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:SPACe {<space>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:SPACe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the space wave number to 10 waves.
Type 1: SPC 10
Type 2 (For reference):BM:SPAC 10
Compatibility Information
The maximum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.
(500000 waves → 999999.5 waves)

6.3.123

SPE/?SPE
Description
Sets/queries the stop value of the DC offsets sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the DC offset setting (OFS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP{<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STOP?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the stop value of the DC offset sweep to +10V. It is assumed that the unit of DC
offset is V, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: SPE 10
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:STOP 10
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2656.3.124

SPF/?SPF
Description
Sets/inquires the value of stop frequency sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the frequency (FRQ)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STOP {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the stop value for the frequency sweep to 10kHz.
Type 1: SPF 1E4Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:STOP 1E4
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.125

SPP/?SPP
Description
Sets/queries the stop value for the phase sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the phase setting (PHS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:STOP {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the stop value for the phase sweep to +90deg.
Type 1: SPP +90
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:STOP +90
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)266

6.3.126

SPU/?SPU
Description
Sets/queries the stop value for the duty sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the duty setting (DTY)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP {<duty cycle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Set the stop value of duty sweep as 60%.
Type 1: SPU 60
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:STOP 60
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.127

SSC/?SSC
Description
Selects/queries the sweep function.
Parameters
Select (0/1) Sweep function
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: LINear (Linear sweep)
1: LOGarithmic (Log sweep)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SPACing {LINear|LOGarithmic}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:SPACing?
Setting example
Sets the sweep function to the log sweep.
Type 1: SSC 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:SPAC LOG
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)267

6.3.128

STA/?STA
Description
Sets/queries the start value for the amplitude sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as amplitude setting (AMV)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STARt{<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:STARt?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the start value for the amplitude sweep to 1Vp-p/open. It is assumed that theamplitude unit is Vp-p, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: STA 1
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:STAR 1
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.129

STE/?STE
Description
Sets/queries the start value of the DC offsets sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the DC offset setting (OFS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt{<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:STARt?
[MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the start value of the DC offset sweep to -10V. It is assumed that the unit of DC
offset is V, and LOAD is set to OPEN in advance.
Type 1: STE -10
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:STAR –10
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)268

6.3.130

STF/?STF
Description
Sets/queries the start value for the frequency sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the frequency setting (FRQ)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STARt {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the start value for the frequency sweep to 1kHz.
Type 1: STF 1E3Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:STAR 1E3
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.131

STM/?STM
Description
Sets/queries the sweep time.
Parameters
Sweep time setting: 1E-3 (1ms) 10E3 (10000s)
Resolution: 1E-3 (1ms)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:TIME {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:TIME?
Setting example
Sets the sweep time to 0.5s.
Type 1: STM 0.5
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:TIME 0.5
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)269

6.3.132

STO
Description
Saves the setting.
There are 10 pairs of the setting memories.
Parameters
Setting Memory number (1 to 10)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *SAV {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}
Query: None
Setting example
Saves the current device setting to the first setting memory.
Type 1: STO 1
Type 2 (For reference): *SAV 1
Compatibility Information
The method to specified memory number is changed from the previous WF194x series.
(0 to 9 → 1 to 10)

6.3.133

STP/?STP
Description
Sets/queries the start value for the phase sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the phase setting (PHS)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:STARt {<phase>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the start value for the phase sweep to -90deg.
Type 1: STP -90
Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:STAR -90
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)2706.3.134?STS
Description
Read status bytes.
Only RQS bit (Bit 6) is cleared among each bit of status byte even if it is read fromthe ?STS and the serial port.
The other bits are cleared when each register/event is cleared.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag consequently
become 0.
Response format
Status byte (0 to 255)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: *STB?
Response example
STS 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.135

STT/?STT
Description
Sets/queries the transfer start address to update the waveform data in the middle of thearbitrary waveform.
The transfer start address is reset (address: 0) in the case of the following situations.
•The waveform data transfer is stopped by the ARB command•The size of the arbitrary waveform data is changed•After power-on•The transfer start address is omitted
Parameters
Transfer starting address
The arbitrary waveform data size 8KW → 0~8191, 16KW → 0~16383,
32KW → 0~32767, 64KW → 0~65535
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :DATA:DAC:ADDRess [<start address>]
Query: :DATA:DAC:ADDRess?
Setting example
Transfers the arbitrary waveform data from the address 2048.
Type 1: STT 2048
Type 2 (For reference):DATA:DAC:ADDR 2048
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.136

STU/?STUWF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)271

Description
Sets/queries the start value for the duty sweep.
Parameters
The setting range is the same as that of the duty setting (DTY)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt {<duty cycle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the start value for the duty sweep to 40%.
Type 1: STU 40
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:STAR 40
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.137

STY/?STY
Description
Selects/inquires the sweep type.
Parameters
Sweep type selection (0 to 4)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: FREQuency(Frequency)
1: PHASe(Phase)2: AMPLitude(Amplitude)3: OFFSet(DC Offset)
4: DUTY(Duty)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:TYPE {FREQuency|PHASe|AMPLitude|OFFSet|DUTY}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:TYPE?
Setting example
Sets the sweep type to the phase sweep.
Type 1: STY 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWP:TYPE PHAS
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.138

SWO/?SWO (WF1948)
Description
Sets/inquires whether to operate start/stop/pause of sweep from the panel key and theexternal control separately for each channel, or common to both channels.
Parameters
Operation status selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (Independent for each channel)
1: ON (Common to both channels)

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

272

Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:SWEep:OCOMmon {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: [:SOURce]:SWEep:OCOMmon?
Setting example
Makes the sweep start/stop/pause operation common in both channels.
Type 1: SWO 1
Type 2 (For reference):SWE:OCOM ON
Compatibility Information
In case of common channel setting (1 or ON), when setting the command to change
frequency or amplitude, it is set as common to both channels.
If you set different frequency or amplitude for each channel, set as 0 or OFF once, andthen set the frequency and/or amplitude.

6.3.139

SYN
Description
Performs the phase synchronization.
Parameters
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :OUTPut:PSYNc
Query: None
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)273

6.3.140

SYT/?SYT
Description
Selects/queries SYNC OUT for the burst/sweep/modulation.
Parameters
SYNC OUT for burst/sweep/modulation
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: ASYNchronous (synchronizes with the burst/sweep/moduration signal)
1: SYNChronous (synchronizes with one wave of the waveform)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :OUTPut:SYNC:TYPE {SYNChronous|ASYNchronous}
Query: :OUTPut:SYNC:TYPE?
Setting example
Synchronizes SYNCOUT for the burst/sweep/modulation with FUNCTION OUT.
Type 1: SYT 1
Type 2 (For reference):OUTP:SYNC:TYPE SYNC
Compatibility Information
Selection/query of SYNC OUT for the modulation of FSK, PSK, and AMSC is notsupported.
To Select/query SYNC OUT for the modulation of FSK, PSK, and AMSC,
the command needs to be replaced with the WF1947/WF1948 command.
[SYNC OUT]
Modulation
Specify SYNCOUT for the corresponding each oscillation mode of FSK,
PSK, and AM(DSB-SC)
FSK
PSK
AM(DSB-SC)[:SOURce[1|2]]: SYNC:FSKey:TYPE[:SOURce[1|2]]:SYNC:PSKeyTYPE[:SOURce[1|2]]:SYNC:AMSC:TYPE

For details, see "2. Command Descriptions

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

Descriptions of Individual Commands."274

6.3.141

TRD/?TRD
Description
Sets /queries the trigger delay.
Parameters
Trigger delay setting: 0 (0s) 100.00 (100s)
Resolution: 5 digits for more than 1ms, 0.1µs for less than 1ms
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:DELay {<delay>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:DELay? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Setting example
Sets the trigger delay to 1ms.
Type 1: TRD 1E-3
Type 2 (For reference):BM:DEL 1E-3
Compatibility Information
The minimum value has been changed from the previous WF194x series.(0.3 µs
0s)

6.3.142→

TRE/?TRE
Description
Selects/queries the status of the external trigger input connector for remote.
•For the Remote state, when the trigger source is EXT and TRE 1,
TRIG/SWEEP IN on the front panel becomes enabled. For local, always enabled.
•At power-on, when the PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) or RST (*RST) command is executed,
it becomes TRE 1.
Parameters
Status selection (0/1)
Type 1
Type 2 (For reference)0: OFF (disables TRIG/SWEEP IN)
1: ON (enables TRIG/SWEEP IN)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ElN:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}
Query: :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EIN:STATe?
Setting example
Enables TRIG/SWEEP IN.
Type 1: TRE 1
Type 2 (For reference):TRIG:EIN:STAT ON
Compatibility Information
It is not support oscillation mode except for the sweep and burst.
A trigger source of the SWEEP IN connector signal is not supported.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2756.3.143

TRG/?TRG
Description
Selects/queries start, stop, and so on for the burst, sweep, modulation. After operation
like start and stop of the sweep and the modulation is performed, corresponding bits on
the operation event register are set or cleared. The response returns a first set value. The
value does not always correspond with the actual operation status.
It becomes 0 at power-on.
This command includes the following functions.
1. Burst
Burst oscillation : Does not change with TRG command. The query result isundefined.
Trigger oscillation : Trigger with TRG 1 (START). The query result is always 0.
Triggered Gate Oscillation: The oscillation state changed by TRG 1 (START).
The query result is always 0.
2. Sweep
TRG 0 to 3 select to stop/start/pause/resume of the sweep respectively.
3. Modulation
TRG 0 and 1 select to stop/start of the modulation respectively.
Does not change with TRG 2, 3.
Parameters
Trigger selection (0 to 3)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: STOP (stop)
1: STARt (start)
2: PAUSe (pause)3: CONTinue (resume)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce {STOP|STARt|PAUSe|CONTinue}
Query: :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?
Setting example
Modulation is canceled.
Type 1: TRG 0
Type 2 (For reference):TRIG:SOUR STOP
Note
While executing the sweep or the modulation, when the oscillation mode is changed on
the other channel, the sweep/modulation is aborted.
Compatibility Information
The gate oscillation is not supported.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)276

6.3.144

TRS/?TRS
Description
Selects/queries the trigger/gate source.
This command is disabled for the trigger gate.
Parameters
Trigger/gate source selection (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: INTernal (uses the internal trigger oscillator as the trigger source)
1: EXTernal (uses the signal of the TRIG/SWEEP IN connector as the trigger
source)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:BM:SOURce {INTemal|EXTernal}
Query: [:SOURce]:BM:SOURce?
Setting example
Sets the signal of the TRIG/SWEEP IN connector as the trigger source.
Type 1: TRS 1
Type 2 (For reference):BM:SOUR EXTCompatibility Information
Compatibility support
A trigger source of the SWEEP IN connector signal is not supported.

6.3.145?TST
Description
Queries whether or not the setting memory was successfully saved as a result of theself-check at power-on.
Response format
Normal/abnormal (0 to 3)
0: No error
1: An error occurred while saving memory. The setting was initialized
2: An error occurred while saving memory. The output voltage accuracy is notguaranteed
3: An error occurred while saving memory. The setting was initialized and the output
voltage accuracy is not guaranteed
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: *TST?
Response example
TST 0Compatibility Information
In previous WF194x, the memory was saved through the battery backup.
In WF1947/WF1948, the memory is saved by the non-volatile memory.

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)277

6.3.146

UAU/?UAU
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of amplitude.
Parameters
The last three parameter among four can be omitted.
The unit name
Type 1: Up to character string data of 4 characters
Type 2 (For reference): Up to character string data of 4 charactersor DEFault (handled same as "USER").
Use/not use of LOG
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: NONE(LOG is not used. The user setting = (original value +offset) x scale)1: LOGarithmic(LOG is used. The user setting = (log (original value) + offset) x scale)ScaleThe scaling factor: -9.99999E+9 to +9.99999E+9 (except for 0)
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9.
Offset
Scaling factor: -9.99999E+4 to +9.99999E+4
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-4 to E+4.
Response format
Unit name, 0/1, scale, offset
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:USER{<unit name>|DEFault}[,{NONE|LOGarithmic|DEFault}[,{<scale>|DEFault}[,{<offset>|DEFault}]]]Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:USER?
Setting example
The name of the amplitude user-defined unit is "km/h". LOG is not used. The scale is 10.
The offset is set to 0.
Type 1: UAU “km/h”,0,10,0
Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:USER “km/h”,NONE,10,0Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)278

6.3.147

UDU/?UDU
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of duty.
Parameters
The last three parameter among four can be omitted.
The unit name
Type 1: Up to character string data of 4 characters
Type 2 (For reference): Up to character string data of 4 charactersor DEFault (handled same as "USER").
Use/not use of LOG
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: NONE (LOG is not used. The user setting = (original value + offset) x
scale)
1: LOGarithmic(LOG is used. The user setting = (log (original value) + offset) x scale)ScaleThe scaling factor: -9.99999E+6 to +9.99999E+6 (except for 0)
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-6 to E+6
Offset
Scaling factor: -9.99999E+4 to +9.99999E+4
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-4 to E+4
Response format
Unit name, 0/1, scale, offset
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCLe:USER{<unit name>|DEFault}[,{NONE|LOGarithmic|DEFault}[,{<scale>|DEFault}[,{<offset>|DEFault}]]]Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCLe:USER?
Setting example
The name of the duty user-defined unit is "INTN". LOG is not used. The scale is 100.
The offset is set to 0.
Type 1: UDU “INTN”,0,100,0Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:USER “INTN”,NONE,100,0Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)279

6.3.148

UFU/?UFU
Description
Sets/queries the frequency user-defined unit.
Parameters
The last three parameter among four can be omitted.
The unit name
Type 1: Up to character string data of 4 characters
Type 2 (For reference): Up to character string data of 4 charactersor DEFault (handled same as "USER").
Use/not use of LOG
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: NONE (LOG is not used. The user setting = (original value + offset) x
scale)
1: LOGarithmic(LOG is used. The user setting = (log (original value) + offset) x scale)ScaleThe scaling factor: -9.99999999999999E+9 to +9.99999999999999E+9 (except for 0)
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9
Offset
Scaling factor: -9.99999999999999E+9 to +9.99999999999999E+9The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9
Response format
Unit name, 0/1, scale, offset
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:USER{<unit name>|DEFault}[,{NONE|LOGarithmic|DEFault}[,{<scale>|DEFault}[,{<offset>|DEFault}]]]Query: [:SOURce]:FREQuency:USER?
Setting example
The name of the frequency user-defined unit is "rpm". LOG is not used. The scale is 60.
The offset is set to 0.
Type 1: UFU “rpm”,0,60,0
Type 2 (For reference):FREQ:USER “rpm”,NONE,60,0Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2806.3.149

UHU/?UHU
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unitof phase.
Parameters
The last three parameter among four can be omitted.
The unit name
Type 1: Up to character string data of 4 characters
Type 2 (For reference): Up to character string data of 4 charactersor DEFault (handled same as "USER").
Use/not use of LOG
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0 : NONE (LOG is not used. The user setting = (original value + offset) x scale)
1 : LOGarithmic(LOG is used. The user setting = (log (original value) + offset) x scale)ScaleThe scaling factor: -9.999999E+9 to +9.999999E+9 (except for 0)
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9
Offset
Scaling factor: -9.999999E+8 to +9.999999E+8
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-8 to E+8
Response format
Unit name, 0/1, scale, offset
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PHASe:USER{<unit name>|DEFault}[,{NONE|LOGarithmic|DEFault}[,{<scale>|DEFault}[,{<offset>|DEFault}]]]Query: [:SOURce]:PHASe:USER?
Setting example
The name of the phase unit is "W". LOG is not used. The scale is 3.141592654. The
offset is set to 0.
Type 1: UHU “W”,0,3.141592654,0Type 2 (For reference):PHAS:USER “W”,NONE,3.141592654,0
Note
When LOG is used, negative values cannot be set as the phase.
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)281

6.3.150

UOU/?UOU
Description
Sets/queries the user-defined unit of DC offset.
Parameters
The last three parameter among four can be omitted.
The unit name
Type 1: Up to character string data of 4 characters
Type 2 (For reference): Up to character string data of 4 charactersor DEFault (handled same as "USER").
Use/not use of LOG
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0: NONE (LOG is not used. The user setting = (original value + offset) x scale)
1 : LOGarithmic(LOG is used. The user setting = (log (original value) + offset) x scale)ScaleThe scaling factor: -9.99999E+9 to +9.99999E+9 (except for 0)
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9.
Offset
Scaling factor: -9.99999E+4 to +9.99999E+4
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-4 to E+4.
Response format
Unit name, 0/1, scale, offset
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:USER{<unit name>|DEFault}[,{NONE|LOGarithmic|DEFault}[,{<scale>|DEFault}[,{<offset>|DEFault}]]]Query: [:SOURce]:VOLTage[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet:USER?
Setting example
The name of the DC offset unit is "kgf". LOG is not used. The scale is 9.8. The offset is
set to 0.
Type 1: UOU “kgf”,0,9.8,0Type 2 (For reference):VOLT:OFFS:USER “kgf”,NONE,9.8,0Note
When LOG is used, negative values cannot be set as the phase.
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)282

6.3.151

UPU/?UPU
Description
Sets/queries the period user-defined unit.
Parameters
The last three parameter among four can be omitted.
The unit name
Type 1: Up to character string data of 4 characters
Type 2 (For reference): Up to character string data of 4 charactersor DEFault (handled same as "USER").
Use/not use of LOG
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)
0 : NONE (LOG is not used. The user setting = (original value + offset) x scale)
1: LOGarithmic(LOG is used. The user setting = (log (original value) + offset) x scale)ScaleThe scaling factor: -9.99999999999999E+9 to +9.99999999999999E+9 (except for 0)
The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9
Offset
Scaling factor: -9.99999999999999E+9 to +9.99999999999999E+9The exponent of the scaling factor is E-9 to E+9
Response format
Unit name, 0/1, scale, offset
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod:USER{<unit name>|DEFault}[,{NONE|LOGarithmic|DEFault}[,{<scale>|DEFault}[,{<offset>|DEFault}]]]Query: [:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod:USER?
Setting example
The name of the period user-defined unit is "PW". LOG is not used. The scale is 1/2.
The offset is set to 0.
Type 1: UPU “PW”,0,0.5,0Type 2 (For reference):PULS:PER:USER “PW”,NONE,0.5,0Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)283

6.3.152

USS
Description
The output is set as the start/stop value for the duty sweep.
Parameters
Start status/stop status (0/1)
Type 1 Type 2 (For reference)0: STOP (stops the sweep)
1: STARt (starts the sweep)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: [:SOURce]:PULSe:DCYCle:STATe {STARt|STOP}
Query: None
Setting example
Stops duty sweep.
Type 1: USS 0
Type 2 (For reference):PULS:DCYC:STAT STOP
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.153?VC1
Description
Queries the CH1 overload event status register.
The CH 1 overload event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
When over occurs, Bit0 is set. When overload disappears, Bit0 is cleared.
Response format
CH 1 Overload event status register value (0 to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: STATus:OVERload:CH1:CONDition?
Response example
VC1 0☞ See "3. Status System."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)284

Compatibility Information
It is not supported. It is necessary to replace with the corresponding command of
WF1947/WF1948.
Questionable data status event register related command:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?]
For details, see "3. Status System."

6.3.154?VC2 (WF1948)
Description
Queries the CH2 overload event status register.
The CH 2 overload event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
When over occurs, Bit0 is set. When overload disappears, Bit0 is cleared.
Response format
CH 2 Overload event status register value (0 to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: STATus:OVERload:CH2:CONDition?
Response example
VC2 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
It is not supported. It is necessary to replace with the corresponding command of
WF1947/WF1948.
Questionable data status event register related command:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?]
For details, see "3. Status System."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)285

6.3.155

VE1/?VE1
Description
Sets/queries the CH 1 overload event status enable register.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the CH 1 overload event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:OVERload:CH1:ENABle<Value>
Query: :STATus:OVERload:CH1:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the CH1 overload event status enable register to 1 (CH1 overload).
Type 1: VE1 1
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:OVER:CH1:ENAB 1☞See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
It is not supported. It is necessary to replace with the corresponding command of
WF1947/WF1948.
Questionable data status event register related command:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?]
For details, see "3. Status System."

6.3.156

VE2/?VE2 (WF1948)
Description
Sets/queries the CH 2 overload event status enable register.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the CH 2 overload event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:OVERload:CH2:ENABle <Value>
Query: :STATus:OVERload:CH2:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the CH2 overload event status enable register to 1 (CH2 overload).
Type 1: VE2 1
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:OVER:CH2:ENAB 1☞ See "3. Status System."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

286

Compatibility Information
It is not supported. It is necessary to replace with the corresponding command of
WF1947/WF1948.
Questionable data status event register related command:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?]
For details, see "3. Status System."

6.3.157?VER
Description
Inquire the version.
Response format(numeric) + (.) + (two digit of numeric)Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: SYSTem:VERSion?
Response example
VER 1.00
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.158?VSC
Description
Queries the overload event status register.
The overload event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
Response format
The value of the overload event status register (0 to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: STATus:OVERload: CONDition?
Response example
VSC 0☞ See "3. Status System."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

287

Compatibility Information
It is not supported. It is necessary to replace with the corresponding command of
WF1947/WF1948.
Questionable data status event register related command:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?]
For details, see "3. Status System."

6.3.159

VSE/?VSE
Description
Sets/queries the overload event status enable register.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the overload event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:OVERload:ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:OVERload:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the overload event status enable register as 0.
Type 1: VSE 0
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:OVER:ENAB 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
It is not supported. It is necessary to replace with the corresponding command of
WF1947/WF1948.
Questionable data status event register related command:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?]
For details, see "3. Status System."

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)288

6.3.160

WAI
Description
Waits to execute subsequent commands until the single sweep/gated sweep is finished.
Parameter:
None
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: *WAIQuery: None
Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.161?WC1
Description
Queries the CH1 warning event status register.
The CH 1 warning event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
Response format
The value of the CH1 warning event status register (0 to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: STATus:WARNing:CH1:CONDition?
Response example
WC1 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)289

6.3.162?WC2 (WF1948)
Description
Queries the CH2 warning event status register.
The CH 2 warning event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
Response format
The value of the CH2 warning event status register (0 to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: STATus:WARNing:CH2:CONDition?
Response example
WC2 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.163

WE1/?WE1
Description
Sets/queries the CH1 warning event status enable register. When the clear at power -on
flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the CH 1 warning event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:WARNing:CH1:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the CH1 warning event status enable register to 16 (bit 4:unit forced change).
Type 1: WE1 16
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:WARN:CH1:ENAB 16☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

2906.3.164WE2/?WE2 (WF1948)
Description
Sets/queries the CH2 warning event status enable register. When the clear at power-on
flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the CH 2 warning event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:WARNing:CH2:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the CH2 warning event status enable register to 24 (bit 3 and 4).
Type 1: WE2 24
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:WARN:CH2:ENAB 24☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

6.3.165?WSC
Description
Queries the warning event status register.
The warning event status register is cleared in the case of the follows.
•After power-on•The CLS (*CLS) command is executed•The PST(:SYSTem:PRESet) command is executed
Response format
The value of the warning event status register (0 to 65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: None
Query: STATus:WARNing:CONDition?
Response example
WSC 0☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)291

6.3.166

WSE/?WSE
Description
Sets/queries the warning event status enable register.
When the clear at power-on flag is set to 1 by PSC commands, the flag is reset to 0.
Parameters
The mask (enable/disable) pattern of the warning event status enable register (0 to65535)
Type 2 (For reference)
Settings: :STATus:WARNing:ENABle <value>
Query: :STATus:WARNing:ENABle?
Setting example
Sets the warning event status enable register to 3 (both bit 0: CH1 warning event status
register and bit 1: CH 2 warning event status register).
Type 1: WSE 3
Type 2 (For reference):STAT:WARN:ENAB 3☞ See "3. Status System."Compatibility Information
Compatibility support

WF1947/WF1948 Instruction Manual (External Control)

292

WABUN: (DA00036700-005)

Notes
No part of the contents of this instruction manual may be reprinted or repro duced without prior permission
from us.
The information in this instruction manual is subject to change without notice.
We have taken enough care regarding the contents of this instruction manual. However, no responsibility
is assumed by us for any damage which may result from the use of the information in the instruction
manual.
Should you notice anything suspicious, error, or erroneous omission, please contact us or our agent fromwhom you purchased the product.

Multifunction Generator
WF1947/WF1948
Instruction Manual (External Control)
NF Corporation
6-3-20 Tsunashima Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama 223-8508, Japan
Phone: +81-45-545-8128 Fax: +81-45-545-8187
http://www.nfcorp.co.jp/
C Copyright 2012-2019, NF Corporation◯

http://www.nfcorp.co.jp/

NF Corporation
6-3-20 Tsunashima Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama 223-8508,
Japan Phone: +81-45-545-8128 (Main)